leandrof/linux
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

Merge branch 'linus' into stackprotector

Browse Source 
Conflicts:
	arch/x86/include/asm/pda.h
	kernel/fork.c
This commit is contained in:
Ingo Molnar 2008-12-31 08:31:57 +01:00
commit a9de18eb76
10030 changed files with 872207 additions and 378102 deletions

3
.mailmap
View File

@ -66,6 +66,7 @@ Kenneth W Chen <kenneth.w.chen@intel.com>
Koushik <raghavendra.koushik@neterion.com>
Leonid I Ananiev <leonid.i.ananiev@intel.com>
Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com>
Mark Brown <broonie@sirena.org.uk>
Matthieu CASTET <castet.matthieu@free.fr>
Michael Buesch <mb@bu3sch.de>
Michael Buesch <mbuesch@freenet.de>
@ -79,6 +80,8 @@ Nguyen Anh Quynh <aquynh@gmail.com>
Paolo 'Blaisorblade' Giarrusso <blaisorblade@yahoo.it>
Patrick Mochel <mochel@digitalimplant.org>
Peter A Jonsson <pj@ludd.ltu.se>
Peter Oruba <peter@oruba.de>
Peter Oruba <peter.oruba@amd.com>
Praveen BP <praveenbp@ti.com>
Rajesh Shah <rajesh.shah@intel.com>
Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>

23
CREDITS
View File

@ -598,6 +598,11 @@ S: Tamsui town, Taipei county,
S: Taiwan 251
S: Republic of China
N: Reinette Chatre
E: reinette.chatre@intel.com
D: WiMedia Link Protocol implementation
D: UWB stack bits and pieces
N: Michael Elizabeth Chastain
E: mec@shout.net
D: Configure, Menuconfig, xconfig
@ -1653,14 +1658,14 @@ S: Chapel Hill, North Carolina 27514-4818
S: USA
N: Dave Jones
E: davej@codemonkey.org.uk
E: davej@redhat.com
W: http://www.codemonkey.org.uk
D: x86 errata/setup maintenance.
D: AGPGART driver.
D: Assorted VIA x86 support.
D: 2.5 AGPGART overhaul.
D: CPUFREQ maintenance.
D: Backport/Forwardport merge monkey.
D: Various Janitor work.
S: United Kingdom
D: Fedora kernel maintainence.
D: Misc/Other.
S: 314 Littleton Rd, Westford, MA 01886, USA
N: Martin Josfsson
E: gandalf@wlug.westbo.se
@ -2695,6 +2700,12 @@ S: Demonstratsii 8-382
S: Tula 300000
S: Russia
N: Inaky Perez-Gonzalez
E: inaky.perez-gonzalez@intel.com
D: UWB stack, HWA-RC driver and HWA-HC drivers
D: Wireless USB additions to the USB stack
D: WiMedia Link Protocol bits and pieces
N: Gordon Peters
E: GordPeters@smarttech.com
D: Isochronous receive for IEEE 1394 driver (OHCI module).

51
Documentation/00-INDEX
View File

@ -21,6 +21,9 @@ Changes
- list of changes that break older software packages.
CodingStyle
- how the boss likes the C code in the kernel to look.
development-process/
- An extended tutorial on how to work with the kernel development
process.
DMA-API.txt
- DMA API, pci_ API & extensions for non-consistent memory machines.
DMA-ISA-LPC.txt
@ -39,14 +42,8 @@ IRQ.txt
- description of what an IRQ is.
ManagementStyle
- how to (attempt to) manage kernel hackers.
MSI-HOWTO.txt
- the Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) Driver Guide HOWTO and FAQ.
RCU/
- directory with info on RCU (read-copy update).
README.DAC960
- info on Mylex DAC960/DAC1100 PCI RAID Controller Driver for Linux.
README.cycladesZ
- info on Cyclades-Z firmware loading.
SAK.txt
- info on Secure Attention Keys.
SM501.txt
@ -83,20 +80,16 @@ blackfin/
- directory with documentation for the Blackfin arch.
block/
- info on the Block I/O (BIO) layer.
blockdev/
- info on block devices & drivers
cachetlb.txt
- describes the cache/TLB flushing interfaces Linux uses.
cciss.txt
- info, major/minor #'s for Compaq's SMART Array Controllers.
cdrom/
- directory with information on the CD-ROM drivers that Linux has.
computone.txt
- info on Computone Intelliport II/Plus Multiport Serial Driver.
connector/
- docs on the netlink based userspace<->kernel space communication mod.
console/
- documentation on Linux console drivers.
cpqarray.txt
- info on using Compaq's SMART2 Intelligent Disk Array Controllers.
cpu-freq/
- info on CPU frequency and voltage scaling.
cpu-hotplug.txt
@ -123,8 +116,6 @@ device-mapper/
- directory with info on Device Mapper.
devices.txt
- plain ASCII listing of all the nodes in /dev/ with major minor #'s.
digiepca.txt
- info on Digi Intl. {PC,PCI,EISA}Xx and Xem series cards.
dontdiff
- file containing a list of files that should never be diff'ed.
driver-model/
@ -149,14 +140,10 @@ filesystems/
- info on the vfs and the various filesystems that Linux supports.
firmware_class/
- request_firmware() hotplug interface info.
floppy.txt
- notes and driver options for the floppy disk driver.
frv/
- Fujitsu FR-V Linux documentation.
gpio.txt
- overview of GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) access conventions.
hayes-esp.txt
- info on using the Hayes ESP serial driver.
highuid.txt
- notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs.
timers/
@ -169,7 +156,7 @@ i2c/
- directory with info about the I2C bus/protocol (2 wire, kHz speed).
i2o/
- directory with info about the Linux I2O subsystem.
i386/
x86/i386/
- directory with info about Linux on Intel 32 bit architecture.
ia64/
- directory with info about Linux on Intel 64 bit architecture.
@ -183,8 +170,6 @@ io_ordering.txt
- info on ordering I/O writes to memory-mapped addresses.
ioctl/
- directory with documents describing various IOCTL calls.
ioctl-number.txt
- how to implement and register device/driver ioctl calls.
iostats.txt
- info on I/O statistics Linux kernel provides.
irqflags-tracing.txt
@ -247,14 +232,10 @@ mips/
- directory with info about Linux on MIPS architecture.
mono.txt
- how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC.
moxa-smartio
- file with info on installing/using Moxa multiport serial driver.
mutex-design.txt
- info on the generic mutex subsystem.
namespaces/
- directory with various information about namespaces
nbd.txt
- info on a TCP implementation of a network block device.
netlabel/
- directory with information on the NetLabel subsystem.
networking/
@ -267,8 +248,6 @@ numastat.txt
- info on how to read Numa policy hit/miss statistics in sysfs.
oops-tracing.txt
- how to decode those nasty internal kernel error dump messages.
paride.txt
- information about the parallel port IDE subsystem.
parisc/
- directory with info on using Linux on PA-RISC architecture.
parport.txt
@ -287,20 +266,16 @@ powerpc/
- directory with info on using Linux with the PowerPC.
preempt-locking.txt
- info on locking under a preemptive kernel.
printk-formats.txt
- how to get printk format specifiers right
prio_tree.txt
- info on radix-priority-search-tree use for indexing vmas.
ramdisk.txt
- short guide on how to set up and use the RAM disk.
rbtree.txt
- info on what red-black trees are and what they are for.
riscom8.txt
- notes on using the RISCom/8 multi-port serial driver.
robust-futex-ABI.txt
- documentation of the robust futex ABI.
robust-futexes.txt
- a description of what robust futexes are.
rocket.txt
- info on the Comtrol RocketPort multiport serial driver.
rt-mutex-design.txt
- description of the RealTime mutex implementation design.
rt-mutex.txt
@ -329,8 +304,6 @@ sparc/
- directory with info on using Linux on Sparc architecture.
sparse.txt
- info on how to obtain and use the sparse tool for typechecking.
specialix.txt
- info on hardware/driver for specialix IO8+ multiport serial card.
spi/
- overview of Linux kernel Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) support.
spinlocks.txt
@ -339,14 +312,10 @@ stable_api_nonsense.txt
- info on why the kernel does not have a stable in-kernel api or abi.
stable_kernel_rules.txt
- rules and procedures for the -stable kernel releases.
stallion.txt
- info on using the Stallion multiport serial driver.
svga.txt
- short guide on selecting video modes at boot via VGA BIOS.
sysfs-rules.txt
- How not to use sysfs.
sx.txt
- info on the Specialix SX/SI multiport serial driver.
sysctl/
- directory with info on the /proc/sys/* files.
sysrq.txt
@ -355,8 +324,6 @@ telephony/
- directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support.
time_interpolators.txt
- info on time interpolators.
tty.txt
- guide to the locking policies of the tty layer.
uml/
- directory with information about User Mode Linux.
unicode.txt
@ -379,7 +346,7 @@ w1/
- directory with documents regarding the 1-wire (w1) subsystem.
watchdog/
- how to auto-reboot Linux if it has "fallen and can't get up". ;-)
x86_64/
x86/x86_64/
- directory with info on Linux support for AMD x86-64 (Hammer) machines.
zorro.txt
- info on writing drivers for Zorro bus devices found on Amigas.

62
Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-usb-usbtmc Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/interface_capabilities
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/device_capabilities
Date: August 2008
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
Description:
These files show the various USB TMC capabilities as described
by the device itself. The full description of the bitfields
can be found in the USB TMC documents from the USB-IF entitled
"Universal Serial Bus Test and Measurement Class Specification
(USBTMC) Revision 1.0" section 4.2.1.8.
The files are read only.
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/usb488_interface_capabilities
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/usb488_device_capabilities
Date: August 2008
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
Description:
These files show the various USB TMC capabilities as described
by the device itself. The full description of the bitfields
can be found in the USB TMC documents from the USB-IF entitled
"Universal Serial Bus Test and Measurement Class, Subclass
USB488 Specification (USBTMC-USB488) Revision 1.0" section
4.2.2.
The files are read only.
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/TermChar
Date: August 2008
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
Description:
This file is the TermChar value to be sent to the USB TMC
device as described by the document, "Universal Serial Bus Test
and Measurement Class Specification
(USBTMC) Revision 1.0" as published by the USB-IF.
Note that the TermCharEnabled file determines if this value is
sent to the device or not.
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/TermCharEnabled
Date: August 2008
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
Description:
This file determines if the TermChar is to be sent to the
device on every transaction or not. For more details about
this, please see the document, "Universal Serial Bus Test and
Measurement Class Specification (USBTMC) Revision 1.0" as
published by the USB-IF.
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/usbtmc/devices/*/auto_abort
Date: August 2008
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
Description:
This file determines if the the transaction of the USB TMC
device is to be automatically aborted if there is any error.
For more details about this, please see the document,
"Universal Serial Bus Test and Measurement Class Specification
(USBTMC) Revision 1.0" as published by the USB-IF.

28
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-umc Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
What: /sys/bus/umc/
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
The Wireless Host Controller Interface (WHCI)
specification describes a PCI-based device with
multiple capabilities; the UWB Multi-interface
Controller (UMC).
The umc bus presents each of the individual
capabilties as a device.
What: /sys/bus/umc/devices/.../capability_id
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
The ID of this capability, with 0 being the radio
controller capability.
What: /sys/bus/umc/devices/.../version
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
The specification version this capability's hardware
interface complies with.

59
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
View File

@ -85,3 +85,62 @@ Description:
Users:
PowerTOP <power@bughost.org>
http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/powertop/
What: /sys/bus/usb/device/<busnum>-<devnum>...:<config num>-<interface num>/supports_autosuspend
Date: January 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@intel.com>
Description:
When read, this file returns 1 if the interface driver
for this interface supports autosuspend. It also
returns 1 if no driver has claimed this interface, as an
unclaimed interface will not stop the device from being
autosuspended if all other interface drivers are idle.
The file returns 0 if autosuspend support has not been
added to the driver.
Users:
USB PM tool
git://git.moblin.org/users/sarah/usb-pm-tool/
What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../authorized
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
Authorized devices are available for use by device
drivers, non-authorized one are not. By default, wired
USB devices are authorized.
Certified Wireless USB devices are not authorized
initially and should be (by writing 1) after the
device has been authenticated.
What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../wusb_cdid
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
For Certified Wireless USB devices only.
A devices's CDID, as 16 space-separated hex octets.
What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../wusb_ck
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
For Certified Wireless USB devices only.
Write the device's connection key (CK) to start the
authentication of the device. The CK is 16
space-separated hex octets.
What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../wusb_disconnect
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
For Certified Wireless USB devices only.
Write a 1 to force the device to disconnect
(equivalent to unplugging a wired USB device).

43
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb-devices-usbsevseg Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../powered
Date: August 2008
Kernel Version: 2.6.26
Contact: Harrison Metzger <harrisonmetz@gmail.com>
Description: Controls whether the device's display will powered.
A value of 0 is off and a non-zero value is on.
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../mode_msb
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../mode_lsb
Date: August 2008
Kernel Version: 2.6.26
Contact: Harrison Metzger <harrisonmetz@gmail.com>
Description: Controls the devices display mode.
For a 6 character display the values are
MSB 0x06; LSB 0x3F, and
for an 8 character display the values are
MSB 0x08; LSB 0xFF.
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../textmode
Date: August 2008
Kernel Version: 2.6.26
Contact: Harrison Metzger <harrisonmetz@gmail.com>
Description: Controls the way the device interprets its text buffer.
raw: each character controls its segment manually
hex: each character is between 0-15
ascii: each character is between '0'-'9' and 'A'-'F'.
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../text
Date: August 2008
Kernel Version: 2.6.26
Contact: Harrison Metzger <harrisonmetz@gmail.com>
Description: The text (or data) for the device to display
Where: /sys/bus/usb/.../decimals
Date: August 2008
Kernel Version: 2.6.26
Contact: Harrison Metzger <harrisonmetz@gmail.com>
Description: Controls the decimal places on the device.
To set the nth decimal place, give this field
the value of 10 ** n. Assume this field has
the value k and has 1 or more decimal places set,
to set the mth place (where m is not already set),
change this fields value to k + 10 ** m.

88
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-c2port Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
What: /sys/class/c2port/
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/ directory will contain files and
directories that will provide a unified interface to
the C2 port interface.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/ directory is related to X-th
C2 port into the system. Each directory will contain files to
manage and control its C2 port.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/access
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/access file enable the access
to the C2 port from the system. No commands can be sent
till this entry is set to 0.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/dev_id
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/dev_id file show the device ID
of the connected micro.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_access
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_access file enable the
access to the on-board flash of the connected micro.
No commands can be sent till this entry is set to 0.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_block_size
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_block_size file show
the on-board flash block size of the connected micro.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_blocks_num
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_blocks_num file show
the on-board flash blocks number of the connected micro.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_data
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_data file export
the content of the on-board flash of the connected micro.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_erase
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_erase file execute
the "erase" command on the on-board flash of the connected
micro.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_erase
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/flash_erase file show the
on-board flash size of the connected micro.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/reset
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/reset file execute a "reset"
command on the connected micro.
What: /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/rev_id
Date: October 2008
Contact: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Description:
The /sys/class/c2port/c2portX/rev_id file show the revision ID
of the connected micro.

25
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-usb_host Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
What: /sys/class/usb_host/usb_hostN/wusb_chid
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
Write the CHID (16 space-separated hex octets) for this host controller.
This starts the host controller, allowing it to accept connection from
WUSB devices.
Set an all zero CHID to stop the host controller.
What: /sys/class/usb_host/usb_hostN/wusb_trust_timeout
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
Devices that haven't sent a WUSB packet to the host
within 'wusb_trust_timeout' ms are considered to have
disconnected and are removed. The default value of
4000 ms is the value required by the WUSB
specification.
Since this relates to security (specifically, the
lifetime of PTKs and GTKs) it should not be changed
from the default.

144
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Interfaces for WiMedia Ultra Wideband Common Radio
Platform (UWB) radio controllers.
Familiarity with the ECMA-368 'High Rate Ultra
Wideband MAC and PHY Specification' is assumed.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/beacon_timeout_ms
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Description:
If no beacons are received from a device for at least
this time, the device will be considered to have gone
and it will be removed. The default is 3 superframes
(~197 ms) as required by the specification.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
An individual UWB radio controller.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/beacon
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Write:
<channel> [<bpst offset>]
to start beaconing on a specific channel, or stop
beaconing if <channel> is -1. Valid channels depends
on the radio controller's supported band groups.
<bpst offset> may be used to try and join a specific
beacon group if more than one was found during a scan.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/scan
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Write:
<channel> <type> [<bpst offset>]
to start (or stop) scanning on a channel. <type> is one of:
0 - scan
1 - scan outside BP
2 - scan while inactive
3 - scanning disabled
4 - scan (with start time of <bpst offset>)
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/mac_address
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
The EUI-48, in colon-separated hex octets, for this
radio controller. A write will change the radio
controller's EUI-48 but only do so while the device is
not beaconing or scanning.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/wusbhc
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A symlink to the device (if any) of the WUSB Host
Controller PAL using this radio controller.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A neighbour UWB device that has either been detected
as part of a scan or is a member of the radio
controllers beacon group.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/BPST
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
The time (using the radio controllers internal 1 ms
interval superframe timer) of the last beacon from
this device was received.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/DevAddr
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
The current DevAddr of this device in colon separated
hex octets.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/EUI_48
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
The EUI-48 of this device in colon separated hex
octets.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/BPST
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/IEs
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
The latest IEs included in this device's beacon, in
space separated hex octets with one IE per line.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/LQE
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Link Quality Estimate - the Signal to Noise Ratio
(SNR) of all packets received from this device in dB.
This gives an estimate on a suitable PHY rate. Refer
to [ECMA-368] section 13.3 for more details.
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/<EUI-48>/RSSI
Date: July 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Received Signal Strength Indication - the strength of
the received signal in dB. LQE is a more useful
measure of the radio link quality.

16
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-acpi
View File

@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Description:
error - an interrupt that can't be accounted for above.
invalid: it's either a wakeup GPE or a GPE/Fixed Event that
invalid: it's either a GPE or a Fixed Event that
doesn't have an event handler.
disable: the GPE/Fixed Event is valid but disabled.
@ -117,30 +117,30 @@ Description:
and other user space applications so that the machine won't shutdown
when pressing the power button.
# cat ff_pwr_btn
0
0 enabled
# press the power button for 3 times;
# cat ff_pwr_btn
3
3 enabled
# echo disable > ff_pwr_btn
# cat ff_pwr_btn
disable
3 disabled
# press the power button for 3 times;
# cat ff_pwr_btn
disable
3 disabled
# echo enable > ff_pwr_btn
# cat ff_pwr_btn
4
4 enabled
/*
* this is because the status bit is set even if the enable bit is cleared,
* and it triggers an ACPI fixed event when the enable bit is set again
*/
# press the power button for 3 times;
# cat ff_pwr_btn
7
7 enabled
# echo disable > ff_pwr_btn
# press the power button for 3 times;
# echo clear > ff_pwr_btn /* clear the status bit */
# echo disable > ff_pwr_btn
# cat ff_pwr_btn
7
7 enabled

13
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-profiling Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
What: /sys/kernel/profile
Date: September 2008
Contact: Dave Hansen <dave@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Description:
/sys/kernel/profile is the runtime equivalent
of the boot-time profile= option.
You can get the same effect running:
echo 2 > /sys/kernel/profile
as you would by issuing profile=2 on the boot
command line.

100
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-wusb_cbaf Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_*
Date: August 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
Various files for managing Cable Based Association of
(wireless) USB devices.
The sequence of operations should be:
1. Device is plugged in.
2. The connection manager (CM) sees a device with CBA capability.
(the wusb_chid etc. files in /sys/devices/blah/OURDEVICE).
3. The CM writes the host name, supported band groups,
and the CHID (host ID) into the wusb_host_name,
wusb_host_band_groups and wusb_chid files. These
get sent to the device and the CDID (if any) for
this host is requested.
4. The CM can verify that the device's supported band
groups (wusb_device_band_groups) are compatible
with the host.
5. The CM reads the wusb_cdid file.
6. The CM looks it up its database.
- If it has a matching CHID,CDID entry, the device
has been authorized before and nothing further
needs to be done.
- If the CDID is zero (or the CM doesn't find a
matching CDID in its database), the device is
assumed to be not known. The CM may associate
the host with device by: writing a randomly
generated CDID to wusb_cdid and then a random CK
to wusb_ck (this uploads the new CC to the
device).
CMD may choose to prompt the user before
associating with a new device.
7. Device is unplugged.
References:
[WUSB-AM] Association Models Supplement to the
Certified Wireless Universal Serial Bus
Specification, version 1.0.
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_chid
Date: August 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
The CHID of the host formatted as 16 space-separated
hex octets.
Writes fetches device's supported band groups and the
the CDID for any existing association with this host.
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_host_name
Date: August 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
A friendly name for the host as a UTF-8 encoded string.
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_host_band_groups
Date: August 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
The band groups supported by the host, in the format
defined in [WUSB-AM].
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_device_band_groups
Date: August 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
The band groups supported by the device, in the format
defined in [WUSB-AM].
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_cdid
Date: August 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
The device's CDID formatted as 16 space-separated hex
octets.
What: /sys/bus/usb/drivers/wusb_cbaf/.../wusb_ck
Date: August 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: David Vrabel <david.vrabel@csr.com>
Description:
Write 16 space-separated random, hex octets to
associate with the device.

8
Documentation/DMA-API.txt
View File

@ -316,12 +316,10 @@ reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later).
pci_map_sg(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents, int direction)
Maps a scatter gather list from the block layer.
Returns: the number of physical segments mapped (this may be shorter
than <nents> passed in if the block layer determines that some
elements of the scatter/gather list are physically adjacent and thus
may be mapped with a single entry).
than <nents> passed in if some elements of the scatter/gather list are
physically or virtually adjacent and an IOMMU maps them with a single
entry).
Please note that the sg cannot be mapped again if it has been mapped once.
The mapping process is allowed to destroy information in the sg.

6
Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
View File

@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
# To add a new book the only step required is to add the book to the
# list of DOCBOOKS.
DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \
DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml mcabook.xml \
kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \
procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml networking.xml \
kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ quiet_cmd_db2ps = PS $@
%.ps : %.xml
$(call cmd,db2ps)
quiet_cmd_db2pdf = PDF $@
quiet_cmd_db2pdf = PDF $@
cmd_db2pdf = $(subst TYPE,pdf, $($(PDF_METHOD)template))
%.pdf : %.xml
$(call cmd,db2pdf)
@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ build_main_index = rm -rf $(main_idx) && \
echo '<h2>Kernel Version: $(KERNELVERSION)</h2>' >> $(main_idx) && \
cat $(HTML) >> $(main_idx)
quiet_cmd_db2html = HTML $@
quiet_cmd_db2html = HTML $@
cmd_db2html = xmlto xhtml $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(patsubst %.html,%,$@) $< && \
echo '<a HREF="$(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))/index.html"> \
$(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))</a><p>' > $@

4
Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl
View File

@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
<surname>Cox</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>alan@redhat.com</email>
<email>alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ CPU B: spin_unlock_irqrestore(&amp;dev_lock, flags)
<chapter id="pubfunctions">
<title>Public Functions Provided</title>
!Iinclude/asm-x86/io_32.h
!Iarch/x86/include/asm/io_32.h
!Elib/iomap.c
</chapter>

3
Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl
View File

@ -557,6 +557,9 @@ Near-term plans include converting all of them, except for "gadgetfs".
</para>
!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_acm.c
!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_ecm.c
!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_subset.c
!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_obex.c
!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_serial.c
</sect1>

10
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
View File

@ -45,8 +45,8 @@
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Atomic and pointer manipulation</title>
!Iinclude/asm-x86/atomic_32.h
!Iinclude/asm-x86/unaligned.h
!Iarch/x86/include/asm/atomic_32.h
!Iarch/x86/include/asm/unaligned.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Delaying, scheduling, and timer routines</title>
@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ X!Ilib/string.c
!Elib/string.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Bit Operations</title>
!Iinclude/asm-x86/bitops.h
!Iarch/x86/include/asm/bitops.h
</sect1>
</chapter>
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ X!Ilib/string.c
!Emm/slab.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>User Space Memory Access</title>
!Iinclude/asm-x86/uaccess_32.h
!Iarch/x86/include/asm/uaccess_32.h
!Earch/x86/lib/usercopy_32.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>More Memory Management Functions</title>
@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c
-->
</sect2>
<sect2><title>MCA Bus DMA</title>
!Iinclude/asm-x86/mca_dma.h
!Iarch/x86/include/asm/mca_dma.h
</sect2>
</sect1>
</chapter>

6
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl
View File

@ -1105,7 +1105,7 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = {
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
Function names as strings (__FUNCTION__).
Function names as strings (__func__).
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
@ -1239,7 +1239,7 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = {
</para>
<para>
<filename>include/asm-x86/delay_32.h:</filename>
<filename>arch/x86/include/asm/delay.h:</filename>
</para>
<programlisting>
#define ndelay(n) (__builtin_constant_p(n) ? \
@ -1265,7 +1265,7 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = {
</programlisting>
<para>
<filename>include/asm-x86/uaccess_32.h:</filename>
<filename>arch/x86/include/asm/uaccess_32.h:</filename>
</para>
<programlisting>

4
Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl
View File

@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
<surname>Cox</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>alan@redhat.com</email>
<email>alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
@ -101,7 +101,7 @@
<chapter id="dmafunctions">
<title>DMA Functions Provided</title>
!Iinclude/asm-x86/mca_dma.h
!Iarch/x86/include/asm/mca_dma.h
</chapter>
</book>

3
Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl
View File

@ -98,9 +98,6 @@
X!Enet/core/wireless.c
</sect1>
-->
<sect1><title>Synchronous PPP</title>
!Edrivers/net/wan/syncppp.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
</book>

29
Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl
View File

@ -14,17 +14,20 @@
<othername>(J.A.K.)</othername>
<surname>Mouw</surname>
<affiliation>
<orgname>Delft University of Technology</orgname>
<orgdiv>Faculty of Information Technology and Systems</orgdiv>
<address>
<email>J.A.K.Mouw@its.tudelft.nl</email>
<pob>PO BOX 5031</pob>
<postcode>2600 GA</postcode>
<city>Delft</city>
<country>The Netherlands</country>
<email>mouw@nl.linux.org</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
<othercredit>
<contrib>
This software and documentation were written while working on the
LART computing board
(<ulink url="http://www.lartmaker.nl/">http://www.lartmaker.nl/</ulink>),
which was sponsored by the Delt University of Technology projects
Mobile Multi-media Communications and Ubiquitous Communications.
</contrib>
</othercredit>
</authorgroup>
<revhistory>
@ -108,18 +111,6 @@
proofreading.
</para>
<para>
This documentation was written while working on the LART
computing board (<ulink
url="http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/">http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/</ulink>),
which is sponsored by the Mobile Multi-media Communications
(<ulink
url="http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/">http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/</ulink>)
and Ubiquitous Communications (<ulink
url="http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/">http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/</ulink>)
projects.
</para>
<para>
Erik
</para>

20
Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c
View File

@ -1,28 +1,16 @@
/*
* procfs_example.c: an example proc interface
*
* Copyright (C) 2001, Erik Mouw (J.A.K.Mouw@its.tudelft.nl)
* Copyright (C) 2001, Erik Mouw (mouw@nl.linux.org)
*
* This file accompanies the procfs-guide in the Linux kernel
* source. Its main use is to demonstrate the concepts and
* functions described in the guide.
*
* This software has been developed while working on the LART
* computing board (http://www.lart.tudelft.nl/), which is
* sponsored by the Mobile Multi-media Communications
* (http://www.mmc.tudelft.nl/) and Ubiquitous Communications
* (http://www.ubicom.tudelft.nl/) projects.
*
* The author can be reached at:
*
* Erik Mouw
* Information and Communication Theory Group
* Faculty of Information Technology and Systems
* Delft University of Technology
* P.O. Box 5031
* 2600 GA Delft
* The Netherlands
*
* computing board (http://www.lartmaker.nl), which was sponsored
* by the Delt University of Technology projects Mobile Multi-media
* Communications and Ubiquitous Communications.
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute
* it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General

1654
Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

99
Documentation/DocBook/wanbook.tmpl
View File

@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="WANGuide">
<bookinfo>
<title>Synchronous PPP and Cisco HDLC Programming Guide</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Alan</firstname>
<surname>Cox</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>alan@redhat.com</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2000</year>
<holder>Alan Cox</holder>
</copyright>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="intro">
<title>Introduction</title>
<para>
The syncppp drivers in Linux provide a fairly complete
implementation of Cisco HDLC and a minimal implementation of
PPP. The longer term goal is to switch the PPP layer to the
generic PPP interface that is new in Linux 2.3.x. The API should
remain unchanged when this is done, but support will then be
available for IPX, compression and other PPP features
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="bugs">
<title>Known Bugs And Assumptions</title>
<para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term>PPP is minimal</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The current PPP implementation is very basic, although sufficient
for most wan usages.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>Cisco HDLC Quirks</term>
<listitem>
<para>
Currently we do not end all packets with the correct Cisco multicast
or unicast flags. Nothing appears to mind too much but this should
be corrected.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry>
</variablelist>
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="pubfunctions">
<title>Public Functions Provided</title>
!Edrivers/net/wan/syncppp.c
</chapter>
</book>

2
Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl
View File

@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
<surname>Cox</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>alan@redhat.com</email>
<email>alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>

4
Documentation/HOWTO
View File

@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ required reading:
Other excellent descriptions of how to create patches properly are:
"The Perfect Patch"
http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt
http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt
"Linux kernel patch submission format"
http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html
@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ all time. It should describe the patch completely, containing:
For more details on what this should all look like, please see the
ChangeLog section of the document:
"The Perfect Patch"
http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt
http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt

511
Documentation/MSI-HOWTO.txt
View File

@ -1,511 +0,0 @@
The MSI Driver Guide HOWTO
Tom L Nguyen tom.l.nguyen@intel.com
10/03/2003
Revised Feb 12, 2004 by Martine Silbermann
email: Martine.Silbermann@hp.com
Revised Jun 25, 2004 by Tom L Nguyen
1. About this guide
This guide describes the basics of Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI),
the advantages of using MSI over traditional interrupt mechanisms,
and how to enable your driver to use MSI or MSI-X. Also included is
a Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) section.
1.1 Terminology
PCI devices can be single-function or multi-function. In either case,
when this text talks about enabling or disabling MSI on a "device
function," it is referring to one specific PCI device and function and
not to all functions on a PCI device (unless the PCI device has only
one function).
2. Copyright 2003 Intel Corporation
3. What is MSI/MSI-X?
Message Signaled Interrupt (MSI), as described in the PCI Local Bus
Specification Revision 2.3 or later, is an optional feature, and a
required feature for PCI Express devices. MSI enables a device function
to request service by sending an Inbound Memory Write on its PCI bus to
the FSB as a Message Signal Interrupt transaction. Because MSI is
generated in the form of a Memory Write, all transaction conditions,
such as a Retry, Master-Abort, Target-Abort or normal completion, are
supported.
A PCI device that supports MSI must also support pin IRQ assertion
interrupt mechanism to provide backward compatibility for systems that
do not support MSI. In systems which support MSI, the bus driver is
responsible for initializing the message address and message data of
the device function's MSI/MSI-X capability structure during device
initial configuration.
An MSI capable device function indicates MSI support by implementing
the MSI/MSI-X capability structure in its PCI capability list. The
device function may implement both the MSI capability structure and
the MSI-X capability structure; however, the bus driver should not
enable both.
The MSI capability structure contains Message Control register,
Message Address register and Message Data register. These registers
provide the bus driver control over MSI. The Message Control register
indicates the MSI capability supported by the device. The Message
Address register specifies the target address and the Message Data
register specifies the characteristics of the message. To request
service, the device function writes the content of the Message Data
register to the target address. The device and its software driver
are prohibited from writing to these registers.
The MSI-X capability structure is an optional extension to MSI. It
uses an independent and separate capability structure. There are
some key advantages to implementing the MSI-X capability structure
over the MSI capability structure as described below.
- Support a larger maximum number of vectors per function.
- Provide the ability for system software to configure
each vector with an independent message address and message
data, specified by a table that resides in Memory Space.
- MSI and MSI-X both support per-vector masking. Per-vector
masking is an optional extension of MSI but a required
feature for MSI-X. Per-vector masking provides the kernel the
ability to mask/unmask a single MSI while running its
interrupt service routine. If per-vector masking is
not supported, then the device driver should provide the
hardware/software synchronization to ensure that the device
generates MSI when the driver wants it to do so.
4. Why use MSI?
As a benefit to the simplification of board design, MSI allows board
designers to remove out-of-band interrupt routing. MSI is another
step towards a legacy-free environment.
Due to increasing pressure on chipset and processor packages to
reduce pin count, the need for interrupt pins is expected to
diminish over time. Devices, due to pin constraints, may implement
messages to increase performance.
PCI Express endpoints uses INTx emulation (in-band messages) instead
of IRQ pin assertion. Using INTx emulation requires interrupt
sharing among devices connected to the same node (PCI bridge) while
MSI is unique (non-shared) and does not require BIOS configuration
support. As a result, the PCI Express technology requires MSI
support for better interrupt performance.
Using MSI enables the device functions to support two or more
vectors, which can be configured to target different CPUs to
increase scalability.
5. Configuring a driver to use MSI/MSI-X
By default, the kernel will not enable MSI/MSI-X on all devices that
support this capability. The CONFIG_PCI_MSI kernel option
must be selected to enable MSI/MSI-X support.
5.1 Including MSI/MSI-X support into the kernel
To allow MSI/MSI-X capable device drivers to selectively enable
MSI/MSI-X (using pci_enable_msi()/pci_enable_msix() as described
below), the VECTOR based scheme needs to be enabled by setting
CONFIG_PCI_MSI during kernel config.
Since the target of the inbound message is the local APIC, providing
CONFIG_X86_LOCAL_APIC must be enabled as well as CONFIG_PCI_MSI.
5.2 Configuring for MSI support
Due to the non-contiguous fashion in vector assignment of the
existing Linux kernel, this version does not support multiple
messages regardless of a device function is capable of supporting
more than one vector. To enable MSI on a device function's MSI
capability structure requires a device driver to call the function
pci_enable_msi() explicitly.
5.2.1 API pci_enable_msi
int pci_enable_msi(struct pci_dev *dev)
With this new API, a device driver that wants to have MSI
enabled on its device function must call this API to enable MSI.
A successful call will initialize the MSI capability structure
with ONE vector, regardless of whether a device function is
capable of supporting multiple messages. This vector replaces the
pre-assigned dev->irq with a new MSI vector. To avoid a conflict
of the new assigned vector with existing pre-assigned vector requires
a device driver to call this API before calling request_irq().
5.2.2 API pci_disable_msi
void pci_disable_msi(struct pci_dev *dev)
This API should always be used to undo the effect of pci_enable_msi()
when a device driver is unloading. This API restores dev->irq with
the pre-assigned IOAPIC vector and switches a device's interrupt
mode to PCI pin-irq assertion/INTx emulation mode.
Note that a device driver should always call free_irq() on the MSI vector
that it has done request_irq() on before calling this API. Failure to do
so results in a BUG_ON() and a device will be left with MSI enabled and
leaks its vector.
5.2.3 MSI mode vs. legacy mode diagram
The below diagram shows the events which switch the interrupt
mode on the MSI-capable device function between MSI mode and
PIN-IRQ assertion mode.
------------ pci_enable_msi ------------------------
| | <=============== | |
| MSI MODE | | PIN-IRQ ASSERTION MODE |
| | ===============> | |
------------ pci_disable_msi ------------------------
Figure 1. MSI Mode vs. Legacy Mode
In Figure 1, a device operates by default in legacy mode. Legacy
in this context means PCI pin-irq assertion or PCI-Express INTx
emulation. A successful MSI request (using pci_enable_msi()) switches
a device's interrupt mode to MSI mode. A pre-assigned IOAPIC vector
stored in dev->irq will be saved by the PCI subsystem and a new
assigned MSI vector will replace dev->irq.
To return back to its default mode, a device driver should always call
pci_disable_msi() to undo the effect of pci_enable_msi(). Note that a
device driver should always call free_irq() on the MSI vector it has
done request_irq() on before calling pci_disable_msi(). Failure to do
so results in a BUG_ON() and a device will be left with MSI enabled and
leaks its vector. Otherwise, the PCI subsystem restores a device's
dev->irq with a pre-assigned IOAPIC vector and marks the released
MSI vector as unused.
Once being marked as unused, there is no guarantee that the PCI
subsystem will reserve this MSI vector for a device. Depending on
the availability of current PCI vector resources and the number of
MSI/MSI-X requests from other drivers, this MSI may be re-assigned.
For the case where the PCI subsystem re-assigns this MSI vector to
another driver, a request to switch back to MSI mode may result
in being assigned a different MSI vector or a failure if no more
vectors are available.
5.3 Configuring for MSI-X support
Due to the ability of the system software to configure each vector of
the MSI-X capability structure with an independent message address
and message data, the non-contiguous fashion in vector assignment of
the existing Linux kernel has no impact on supporting multiple
messages on an MSI-X capable device functions. To enable MSI-X on
a device function's MSI-X capability structure requires its device
driver to call the function pci_enable_msix() explicitly.
The function pci_enable_msix(), once invoked, enables either
all or nothing, depending on the current availability of PCI vector
resources. If the PCI vector resources are available for the number
of vectors requested by a device driver, this function will configure
the MSI-X table of the MSI-X capability structure of a device with
requested messages. To emphasize this reason, for example, a device
may be capable for supporting the maximum of 32 vectors while its
software driver usually may request 4 vectors. It is recommended
that the device driver should call this function once during the
initialization phase of the device driver.
Unlike the function pci_enable_msi(), the function pci_enable_msix()
does not replace the pre-assigned IOAPIC dev->irq with a new MSI
vector because the PCI subsystem writes the 1:1 vector-to-entry mapping
into the field vector of each element contained in a second argument.
Note that the pre-assigned IOAPIC dev->irq is valid only if the device
operates in PIN-IRQ assertion mode. In MSI-X mode, any attempt at
using dev->irq by the device driver to request for interrupt service
may result in unpredictable behavior.
For each MSI-X vector granted, a device driver is responsible for calling
other functions like request_irq(), enable_irq(), etc. to enable
this vector with its corresponding interrupt service handler. It is
a device driver's choice to assign all vectors with the same
interrupt service handler or each vector with a unique interrupt
service handler.
5.3.1 Handling MMIO address space of MSI-X Table
The PCI 3.0 specification has implementation notes that MMIO address
space for a device's MSI-X structure should be isolated so that the
software system can set different pages for controlling accesses to the
MSI-X structure. The implementation of MSI support requires the PCI
subsystem, not a device driver, to maintain full control of the MSI-X
table/MSI-X PBA (Pending Bit Array) and MMIO address space of the MSI-X
table/MSI-X PBA. A device driver is prohibited from requesting the MMIO
address space of the MSI-X table/MSI-X PBA. Otherwise, the PCI subsystem
will fail enabling MSI-X on its hardware device when it calls the function
pci_enable_msix().
5.3.2 API pci_enable_msix
int pci_enable_msix(struct pci_dev *dev, struct msix_entry *entries, int nvec)
This API enables a device driver to request the PCI subsystem
to enable MSI-X messages on its hardware device. Depending on
the availability of PCI vectors resources, the PCI subsystem enables
either all or none of the requested vectors.
Argument 'dev' points to the device (pci_dev) structure.
Argument 'entries' is a pointer to an array of msix_entry structs.
The number of entries is indicated in argument 'nvec'.
struct msix_entry is defined in /driver/pci/msi.h:
struct msix_entry {
u16 vector; /* kernel uses to write alloc vector */
u16 entry; /* driver uses to specify entry */
};
A device driver is responsible for initializing the field 'entry' of
each element with a unique entry supported by MSI-X table. Otherwise,
-EINVAL will be returned as a result. A successful return of zero
indicates the PCI subsystem completed initializing each of the requested
entries of the MSI-X table with message address and message data.
Last but not least, the PCI subsystem will write the 1:1
vector-to-entry mapping into the field 'vector' of each element. A
device driver is responsible for keeping track of allocated MSI-X
vectors in its internal data structure.
A return of zero indicates that the number of MSI-X vectors was
successfully allocated. A return of greater than zero indicates
MSI-X vector shortage. Or a return of less than zero indicates
a failure. This failure may be a result of duplicate entries
specified in second argument, or a result of no available vector,
or a result of failing to initialize MSI-X table entries.
5.3.3 API pci_disable_msix
void pci_disable_msix(struct pci_dev *dev)
This API should always be used to undo the effect of pci_enable_msix()
when a device driver is unloading. Note that a device driver should
always call free_irq() on all MSI-X vectors it has done request_irq()
on before calling this API. Failure to do so results in a BUG_ON() and
a device will be left with MSI-X enabled and leaks its vectors.
5.3.4 MSI-X mode vs. legacy mode diagram
The below diagram shows the events which switch the interrupt
mode on the MSI-X capable device function between MSI-X mode and
PIN-IRQ assertion mode (legacy).
------------ pci_enable_msix(,,n) ------------------------
| | <=============== | |
| MSI-X MODE | | PIN-IRQ ASSERTION MODE |
| | ===============> | |
------------ pci_disable_msix ------------------------
Figure 2. MSI-X Mode vs. Legacy Mode
In Figure 2, a device operates by default in legacy mode. A
successful MSI-X request (using pci_enable_msix()) switches a
device's interrupt mode to MSI-X mode. A pre-assigned IOAPIC vector
stored in dev->irq will be saved by the PCI subsystem; however,
unlike MSI mode, the PCI subsystem will not replace dev->irq with
assigned MSI-X vector because the PCI subsystem already writes the 1:1
vector-to-entry mapping into the field 'vector' of each element
specified in second argument.
To return back to its default mode, a device driver should always call
pci_disable_msix() to undo the effect of pci_enable_msix(). Note that
a device driver should always call free_irq() on all MSI-X vectors it
has done request_irq() on before calling pci_disable_msix(). Failure
to do so results in a BUG_ON() and a device will be left with MSI-X
enabled and leaks its vectors. Otherwise, the PCI subsystem switches a
device function's interrupt mode from MSI-X mode to legacy mode and
marks all allocated MSI-X vectors as unused.
Once being marked as unused, there is no guarantee that the PCI
subsystem will reserve these MSI-X vectors for a device. Depending on
the availability of current PCI vector resources and the number of
MSI/MSI-X requests from other drivers, these MSI-X vectors may be
re-assigned.
For the case where the PCI subsystem re-assigned these MSI-X vectors
to other drivers, a request to switch back to MSI-X mode may result
being assigned with another set of MSI-X vectors or a failure if no
more vectors are available.
5.4 Handling function implementing both MSI and MSI-X capabilities
For the case where a function implements both MSI and MSI-X
capabilities, the PCI subsystem enables a device to run either in MSI
mode or MSI-X mode but not both. A device driver determines whether it
wants MSI or MSI-X enabled on its hardware device. Once a device
driver requests for MSI, for example, it is prohibited from requesting
MSI-X; in other words, a device driver is not permitted to ping-pong
between MSI mod MSI-X mode during a run-time.
5.5 Hardware requirements for MSI/MSI-X support
MSI/MSI-X support requires support from both system hardware and
individual hardware device functions.
5.5.1 Required x86 hardware support
Since the target of MSI address is the local APIC CPU, enabling
MSI/MSI-X support in the Linux kernel is dependent on whether existing
system hardware supports local APIC. Users should verify that their
system supports local APIC operation by testing that it runs when
CONFIG_X86_LOCAL_APIC=y.
In SMP environment, CONFIG_X86_LOCAL_APIC is automatically set;
however, in UP environment, users must manually set
CONFIG_X86_LOCAL_APIC. Once CONFIG_X86_LOCAL_APIC=y, setting
CONFIG_PCI_MSI enables the VECTOR based scheme and the option for
MSI-capable device drivers to selectively enable MSI/MSI-X.
Note that CONFIG_X86_IO_APIC setting is irrelevant because MSI/MSI-X
vector is allocated new during runtime and MSI/MSI-X support does not
depend on BIOS support. This key independency enables MSI/MSI-X
support on future IOxAPIC free platforms.
5.5.2 Device hardware support
The hardware device function supports MSI by indicating the
MSI/MSI-X capability structure on its PCI capability list. By
default, this capability structure will not be initialized by
the kernel to enable MSI during the system boot. In other words,
the device function is running on its default pin assertion mode.
Note that in many cases the hardware supporting MSI have bugs,
which may result in system hangs. The software driver of specific
MSI-capable hardware is responsible for deciding whether to call
pci_enable_msi or not. A return of zero indicates the kernel
successfully initialized the MSI/MSI-X capability structure of the
device function. The device function is now running on MSI/MSI-X mode.
5.6 How to tell whether MSI/MSI-X is enabled on device function
At the driver level, a return of zero from the function call of
pci_enable_msi()/pci_enable_msix() indicates to a device driver that
its device function is initialized successfully and ready to run in
MSI/MSI-X mode.
At the user level, users can use the command 'cat /proc/interrupts'
to display the vectors allocated for devices and their interrupt
MSI/MSI-X modes ("PCI-MSI"/"PCI-MSI-X"). Below shows MSI mode is
enabled on a SCSI Adaptec 39320D Ultra320 controller.
CPU0 CPU1
0: 324639 0 IO-APIC-edge timer
1: 1186 0 IO-APIC-edge i8042
2: 0 0 XT-PIC cascade
12: 2797 0 IO-APIC-edge i8042
14: 6543 0 IO-APIC-edge ide0
15: 1 0 IO-APIC-edge ide1
169: 0 0 IO-APIC-level uhci-hcd
185: 0 0 IO-APIC-level uhci-hcd
193: 138 10 PCI-MSI aic79xx
201: 30 0 PCI-MSI aic79xx
225: 30 0 IO-APIC-level aic7xxx
233: 30 0 IO-APIC-level aic7xxx
NMI: 0 0
LOC: 324553 325068
ERR: 0
MIS: 0
6. MSI quirks
Several PCI chipsets or devices are known to not support MSI.
The PCI stack provides 3 possible levels of MSI disabling:
* on a single device
* on all devices behind a specific bridge
* globally
6.1. Disabling MSI on a single device
Under some circumstances it might be required to disable MSI on a
single device. This may be achieved by either not calling pci_enable_msi()
or all, or setting the pci_dev->no_msi flag before (most of the time
in a quirk).
6.2. Disabling MSI below a bridge
The vast majority of MSI quirks are required by PCI bridges not
being able to route MSI between busses. In this case, MSI have to be
disabled on all devices behind this bridge. It is achieves by setting
the PCI_BUS_FLAGS_NO_MSI flag in the pci_bus->bus_flags of the bridge
subordinate bus. There is no need to set the same flag on bridges that
are below the broken bridge. When pci_enable_msi() is called to enable
MSI on a device, pci_msi_supported() takes care of checking the NO_MSI
flag in all parent busses of the device.
Some bridges actually support dynamic MSI support enabling/disabling
by changing some bits in their PCI configuration space (especially
the Hypertransport chipsets such as the nVidia nForce and Serverworks
HT2000). It may then be required to update the NO_MSI flag on the
corresponding devices in the sysfs hierarchy. To enable MSI support
on device "0000:00:0e", do:
echo 1 > /sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:00:0e/msi_bus
To disable MSI support, echo 0 instead of 1. Note that it should be
used with caution since changing this value might break interrupts.
6.3. Disabling MSI globally
Some extreme cases may require to disable MSI globally on the system.
For now, the only known case is a Serverworks PCI-X chipsets (MSI are
not supported on several busses that are not all connected to the
chipset in the Linux PCI hierarchy). In the vast majority of other
cases, disabling only behind a specific bridge is enough.
For debugging purpose, the user may also pass pci=nomsi on the kernel
command-line to explicitly disable MSI globally. But, once the appro-
priate quirks are added to the kernel, this option should not be
required anymore.
6.4. Finding why MSI cannot be enabled on a device
Assuming that MSI are not enabled on a device, you should look at
dmesg to find messages that quirks may output when disabling MSI
on some devices, some bridges or even globally.
Then, lspci -t gives the list of bridges above a device. Reading
/sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:00:0e/msi_bus will tell you whether MSI
are enabled (1) or disabled (0). In 0 is found in a single bridge
msi_bus file above the device, MSI cannot be enabled.
7. FAQ
Q1. Are there any limitations on using the MSI?
A1. If the PCI device supports MSI and conforms to the
specification and the platform supports the APIC local bus,
then using MSI should work.
Q2. Will it work on all the Pentium processors (P3, P4, Xeon,
AMD processors)? In P3 IPI's are transmitted on the APIC local
bus and in P4 and Xeon they are transmitted on the system
bus. Are there any implications with this?
A2. MSI support enables a PCI device sending an inbound
memory write (0xfeexxxxx as target address) on its PCI bus
directly to the FSB. Since the message address has a
redirection hint bit cleared, it should work.
Q3. The target address 0xfeexxxxx will be translated by the
Host Bridge into an interrupt message. Are there any
limitations on the chipsets such as Intel 8xx, Intel e7xxx,
or VIA?
A3. If these chipsets support an inbound memory write with
target address set as 0xfeexxxxx, as conformed to PCI
specification 2.3 or latest, then it should work.
Q4. From the driver point of view, if the MSI is lost because
of errors occurring during inbound memory write, then it may
wait forever. Is there a mechanism for it to recover?
A4. Since the target of the transaction is an inbound memory
write, all transaction termination conditions (Retry,
Master-Abort, Target-Abort, or normal completion) are
supported. A device sending an MSI must abide by all the PCI
rules and conditions regarding that inbound memory write. So,
if a retry is signaled it must retry, etc... We believe that
the recommendation for Abort is also a retry (refer to PCI
specification 2.3 or latest).

2
Documentation/ManagementStyle
View File

@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ companies. If you sign purchase orders or you have any clue about the
budget of your group, you're almost certainly not a kernel manager.
These suggestions may or may not apply to you.
First off, I'd suggest buying "Seven Habits of Highly Successful
First off, I'd suggest buying "Seven Habits of Highly Effective
People", and NOT read it. Burn it, it's a great symbolic gesture.
(*) This document does so not so much by answering the question, but by

2
Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX
View File

@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
00-INDEX
- this file
MSI-HOWTO.txt
- the Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) Driver Guide HOWTO and FAQ.
PCI-DMA-mapping.txt
- info for PCI drivers using DMA portably across all platforms
PCIEBUS-HOWTO.txt

509
Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,509 @@
The MSI Driver Guide HOWTO
Tom L Nguyen tom.l.nguyen@intel.com
10/03/2003
Revised Feb 12, 2004 by Martine Silbermann
email: Martine.Silbermann@hp.com
Revised Jun 25, 2004 by Tom L Nguyen
1. About this guide
This guide describes the basics of Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI),
the advantages of using MSI over traditional interrupt mechanisms,
and how to enable your driver to use MSI or MSI-X. Also included is
a Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) section.
1.1 Terminology
PCI devices can be single-function or multi-function. In either case,
when this text talks about enabling or disabling MSI on a "device
function," it is referring to one specific PCI device and function and
not to all functions on a PCI device (unless the PCI device has only
one function).
2. Copyright 2003 Intel Corporation
3. What is MSI/MSI-X?
Message Signaled Interrupt (MSI), as described in the PCI Local Bus
Specification Revision 2.3 or later, is an optional feature, and a
required feature for PCI Express devices. MSI enables a device function
to request service by sending an Inbound Memory Write on its PCI bus to
the FSB as a Message Signal Interrupt transaction. Because MSI is
generated in the form of a Memory Write, all transaction conditions,
such as a Retry, Master-Abort, Target-Abort or normal completion, are
supported.
A PCI device that supports MSI must also support pin IRQ assertion
interrupt mechanism to provide backward compatibility for systems that
do not support MSI. In systems which support MSI, the bus driver is
responsible for initializing the message address and message data of
the device function's MSI/MSI-X capability structure during device
initial configuration.
An MSI capable device function indicates MSI support by implementing
the MSI/MSI-X capability structure in its PCI capability list. The
device function may implement both the MSI capability structure and
the MSI-X capability structure; however, the bus driver should not
enable both.
The MSI capability structure contains Message Control register,
Message Address register and Message Data register. These registers
provide the bus driver control over MSI. The Message Control register
indicates the MSI capability supported by the device. The Message
Address register specifies the target address and the Message Data
register specifies the characteristics of the message. To request
service, the device function writes the content of the Message Data
register to the target address. The device and its software driver
are prohibited from writing to these registers.
The MSI-X capability structure is an optional extension to MSI. It
uses an independent and separate capability structure. There are
some key advantages to implementing the MSI-X capability structure
over the MSI capability structure as described below.
- Support a larger maximum number of vectors per function.
- Provide the ability for system software to configure
each vector with an independent message address and message
data, specified by a table that resides in Memory Space.
- MSI and MSI-X both support per-vector masking. Per-vector
masking is an optional extension of MSI but a required
feature for MSI-X. Per-vector masking provides the kernel the
ability to mask/unmask a single MSI while running its
interrupt service routine. If per-vector masking is
not supported, then the device driver should provide the
hardware/software synchronization to ensure that the device
generates MSI when the driver wants it to do so.
4. Why use MSI?
As a benefit to the simplification of board design, MSI allows board
designers to remove out-of-band interrupt routing. MSI is another
step towards a legacy-free environment.
Due to increasing pressure on chipset and processor packages to
reduce pin count, the need for interrupt pins is expected to
diminish over time. Devices, due to pin constraints, may implement
messages to increase performance.
PCI Express endpoints uses INTx emulation (in-band messages) instead
of IRQ pin assertion. Using INTx emulation requires interrupt
sharing among devices connected to the same node (PCI bridge) while
MSI is unique (non-shared) and does not require BIOS configuration
support. As a result, the PCI Express technology requires MSI
support for better interrupt performance.
Using MSI enables the device functions to support two or more
vectors, which can be configured to target different CPUs to
increase scalability.
5. Configuring a driver to use MSI/MSI-X
By default, the kernel will not enable MSI/MSI-X on all devices that
support this capability. The CONFIG_PCI_MSI kernel option
must be selected to enable MSI/MSI-X support.
5.1 Including MSI/MSI-X support into the kernel
To allow MSI/MSI-X capable device drivers to selectively enable
MSI/MSI-X (using pci_enable_msi()/pci_enable_msix() as described
below), the VECTOR based scheme needs to be enabled by setting
CONFIG_PCI_MSI during kernel config.
Since the target of the inbound message is the local APIC, providing
CONFIG_X86_LOCAL_APIC must be enabled as well as CONFIG_PCI_MSI.
5.2 Configuring for MSI support
Due to the non-contiguous fashion in vector assignment of the
existing Linux kernel, this version does not support multiple
messages regardless of a device function is capable of supporting
more than one vector. To enable MSI on a device function's MSI
capability structure requires a device driver to call the function
pci_enable_msi() explicitly.
5.2.1 API pci_enable_msi
int pci_enable_msi(struct pci_dev *dev)
With this new API, a device driver that wants to have MSI
enabled on its device function must call this API to enable MSI.
A successful call will initialize the MSI capability structure
with ONE vector, regardless of whether a device function is
capable of supporting multiple messages. This vector replaces the
pre-assigned dev->irq with a new MSI vector. To avoid a conflict
of the new assigned vector with existing pre-assigned vector requires
a device driver to call this API before calling request_irq().
5.2.2 API pci_disable_msi
void pci_disable_msi(struct pci_dev *dev)
This API should always be used to undo the effect of pci_enable_msi()
when a device driver is unloading. This API restores dev->irq with
the pre-assigned IOAPIC vector and switches a device's interrupt
mode to PCI pin-irq assertion/INTx emulation mode.
Note that a device driver should always call free_irq() on the MSI vector
that it has done request_irq() on before calling this API. Failure to do
so results in a BUG_ON() and a device will be left with MSI enabled and
leaks its vector.
5.2.3 MSI mode vs. legacy mode diagram
The below diagram shows the events which switch the interrupt
mode on the MSI-capable device function between MSI mode and
PIN-IRQ assertion mode.
------------ pci_enable_msi ------------------------
| | <=============== | |
| MSI MODE | | PIN-IRQ ASSERTION MODE |
| | ===============> | |
------------ pci_disable_msi ------------------------
Figure 1. MSI Mode vs. Legacy Mode
In Figure 1, a device operates by default in legacy mode. Legacy
in this context means PCI pin-irq assertion or PCI-Express INTx
emulation. A successful MSI request (using pci_enable_msi()) switches
a device's interrupt mode to MSI mode. A pre-assigned IOAPIC vector
stored in dev->irq will be saved by the PCI subsystem and a new
assigned MSI vector will replace dev->irq.
To return back to its default mode, a device driver should always call
pci_disable_msi() to undo the effect of pci_enable_msi(). Note that a
device driver should always call free_irq() on the MSI vector it has
done request_irq() on before calling pci_disable_msi(). Failure to do
so results in a BUG_ON() and a device will be left with MSI enabled and
leaks its vector. Otherwise, the PCI subsystem restores a device's
dev->irq with a pre-assigned IOAPIC vector and marks the released
MSI vector as unused.
Once being marked as unused, there is no guarantee that the PCI
subsystem will reserve this MSI vector for a device. Depending on
the availability of current PCI vector resources and the number of
MSI/MSI-X requests from other drivers, this MSI may be re-assigned.
For the case where the PCI subsystem re-assigns this MSI vector to
another driver, a request to switch back to MSI mode may result
in being assigned a different MSI vector or a failure if no more
vectors are available.
5.3 Configuring for MSI-X support
Due to the ability of the system software to configure each vector of
the MSI-X capability structure with an independent message address
and message data, the non-contiguous fashion in vector assignment of
the existing Linux kernel has no impact on supporting multiple
messages on an MSI-X capable device functions. To enable MSI-X on
a device function's MSI-X capability structure requires its device
driver to call the function pci_enable_msix() explicitly.
The function pci_enable_msix(), once invoked, enables either
all or nothing, depending on the current availability of PCI vector
resources. If the PCI vector resources are available for the number
of vectors requested by a device driver, this function will configure
the MSI-X table of the MSI-X capability structure of a device with
requested messages. To emphasize this reason, for example, a device
may be capable for supporting the maximum of 32 vectors while its
software driver usually may request 4 vectors. It is recommended
that the device driver should call this function once during the
initialization phase of the device driver.
Unlike the function pci_enable_msi(), the function pci_enable_msix()
does not replace the pre-assigned IOAPIC dev->irq with a new MSI
vector because the PCI subsystem writes the 1:1 vector-to-entry mapping
into the field vector of each element contained in a second argument.
Note that the pre-assigned IOAPIC dev->irq is valid only if the device
operates in PIN-IRQ assertion mode. In MSI-X mode, any attempt at
using dev->irq by the device driver to request for interrupt service
may result in unpredictable behavior.
For each MSI-X vector granted, a device driver is responsible for calling
other functions like request_irq(), enable_irq(), etc. to enable
this vector with its corresponding interrupt service handler. It is
a device driver's choice to assign all vectors with the same
interrupt service handler or each vector with a unique interrupt
service handler.
5.3.1 Handling MMIO address space of MSI-X Table
The PCI 3.0 specification has implementation notes that MMIO address
space for a device's MSI-X structure should be isolated so that the
software system can set different pages for controlling accesses to the
MSI-X structure. The implementation of MSI support requires the PCI
subsystem, not a device driver, to maintain full control of the MSI-X
table/MSI-X PBA (Pending Bit Array) and MMIO address space of the MSI-X
table/MSI-X PBA. A device driver should not access the MMIO address
space of the MSI-X table/MSI-X PBA.
5.3.2 API pci_enable_msix
int pci_enable_msix(struct pci_dev *dev, struct msix_entry *entries, int nvec)
This API enables a device driver to request the PCI subsystem
to enable MSI-X messages on its hardware device. Depending on
the availability of PCI vectors resources, the PCI subsystem enables
either all or none of the requested vectors.
Argument 'dev' points to the device (pci_dev) structure.
Argument 'entries' is a pointer to an array of msix_entry structs.
The number of entries is indicated in argument 'nvec'.
struct msix_entry is defined in /driver/pci/msi.h:
struct msix_entry {
u16 vector; /* kernel uses to write alloc vector */
u16 entry; /* driver uses to specify entry */
};
A device driver is responsible for initializing the field 'entry' of
each element with a unique entry supported by MSI-X table. Otherwise,
-EINVAL will be returned as a result. A successful return of zero
indicates the PCI subsystem completed initializing each of the requested
entries of the MSI-X table with message address and message data.
Last but not least, the PCI subsystem will write the 1:1
vector-to-entry mapping into the field 'vector' of each element. A
device driver is responsible for keeping track of allocated MSI-X
vectors in its internal data structure.
A return of zero indicates that the number of MSI-X vectors was
successfully allocated. A return of greater than zero indicates
MSI-X vector shortage. Or a return of less than zero indicates
a failure. This failure may be a result of duplicate entries
specified in second argument, or a result of no available vector,
or a result of failing to initialize MSI-X table entries.
5.3.3 API pci_disable_msix
void pci_disable_msix(struct pci_dev *dev)
This API should always be used to undo the effect of pci_enable_msix()
when a device driver is unloading. Note that a device driver should
always call free_irq() on all MSI-X vectors it has done request_irq()
on before calling this API. Failure to do so results in a BUG_ON() and
a device will be left with MSI-X enabled and leaks its vectors.
5.3.4 MSI-X mode vs. legacy mode diagram
The below diagram shows the events which switch the interrupt
mode on the MSI-X capable device function between MSI-X mode and
PIN-IRQ assertion mode (legacy).
------------ pci_enable_msix(,,n) ------------------------
| | <=============== | |
| MSI-X MODE | | PIN-IRQ ASSERTION MODE |
| | ===============> | |
------------ pci_disable_msix ------------------------
Figure 2. MSI-X Mode vs. Legacy Mode
In Figure 2, a device operates by default in legacy mode. A
successful MSI-X request (using pci_enable_msix()) switches a
device's interrupt mode to MSI-X mode. A pre-assigned IOAPIC vector
stored in dev->irq will be saved by the PCI subsystem; however,
unlike MSI mode, the PCI subsystem will not replace dev->irq with
assigned MSI-X vector because the PCI subsystem already writes the 1:1
vector-to-entry mapping into the field 'vector' of each element
specified in second argument.
To return back to its default mode, a device driver should always call
pci_disable_msix() to undo the effect of pci_enable_msix(). Note that
a device driver should always call free_irq() on all MSI-X vectors it
has done request_irq() on before calling pci_disable_msix(). Failure
to do so results in a BUG_ON() and a device will be left with MSI-X
enabled and leaks its vectors. Otherwise, the PCI subsystem switches a
device function's interrupt mode from MSI-X mode to legacy mode and
marks all allocated MSI-X vectors as unused.
Once being marked as unused, there is no guarantee that the PCI
subsystem will reserve these MSI-X vectors for a device. Depending on
the availability of current PCI vector resources and the number of
MSI/MSI-X requests from other drivers, these MSI-X vectors may be
re-assigned.
For the case where the PCI subsystem re-assigned these MSI-X vectors
to other drivers, a request to switch back to MSI-X mode may result
being assigned with another set of MSI-X vectors or a failure if no
more vectors are available.
5.4 Handling function implementing both MSI and MSI-X capabilities
For the case where a function implements both MSI and MSI-X
capabilities, the PCI subsystem enables a device to run either in MSI
mode or MSI-X mode but not both. A device driver determines whether it
wants MSI or MSI-X enabled on its hardware device. Once a device
driver requests for MSI, for example, it is prohibited from requesting
MSI-X; in other words, a device driver is not permitted to ping-pong
between MSI mod MSI-X mode during a run-time.
5.5 Hardware requirements for MSI/MSI-X support
MSI/MSI-X support requires support from both system hardware and
individual hardware device functions.
5.5.1 Required x86 hardware support
Since the target of MSI address is the local APIC CPU, enabling
MSI/MSI-X support in the Linux kernel is dependent on whether existing
system hardware supports local APIC. Users should verify that their
system supports local APIC operation by testing that it runs when
CONFIG_X86_LOCAL_APIC=y.
In SMP environment, CONFIG_X86_LOCAL_APIC is automatically set;
however, in UP environment, users must manually set
CONFIG_X86_LOCAL_APIC. Once CONFIG_X86_LOCAL_APIC=y, setting
CONFIG_PCI_MSI enables the VECTOR based scheme and the option for
MSI-capable device drivers to selectively enable MSI/MSI-X.
Note that CONFIG_X86_IO_APIC setting is irrelevant because MSI/MSI-X
vector is allocated new during runtime and MSI/MSI-X support does not
depend on BIOS support. This key independency enables MSI/MSI-X
support on future IOxAPIC free platforms.
5.5.2 Device hardware support
The hardware device function supports MSI by indicating the
MSI/MSI-X capability structure on its PCI capability list. By
default, this capability structure will not be initialized by
the kernel to enable MSI during the system boot. In other words,
the device function is running on its default pin assertion mode.
Note that in many cases the hardware supporting MSI have bugs,
which may result in system hangs. The software driver of specific
MSI-capable hardware is responsible for deciding whether to call
pci_enable_msi or not. A return of zero indicates the kernel
successfully initialized the MSI/MSI-X capability structure of the
device function. The device function is now running on MSI/MSI-X mode.
5.6 How to tell whether MSI/MSI-X is enabled on device function
At the driver level, a return of zero from the function call of
pci_enable_msi()/pci_enable_msix() indicates to a device driver that
its device function is initialized successfully and ready to run in
MSI/MSI-X mode.
At the user level, users can use the command 'cat /proc/interrupts'
to display the vectors allocated for devices and their interrupt
MSI/MSI-X modes ("PCI-MSI"/"PCI-MSI-X"). Below shows MSI mode is
enabled on a SCSI Adaptec 39320D Ultra320 controller.
CPU0 CPU1
0: 324639 0 IO-APIC-edge timer
1: 1186 0 IO-APIC-edge i8042
2: 0 0 XT-PIC cascade
12: 2797 0 IO-APIC-edge i8042
14: 6543 0 IO-APIC-edge ide0
15: 1 0 IO-APIC-edge ide1
169: 0 0 IO-APIC-level uhci-hcd
185: 0 0 IO-APIC-level uhci-hcd
193: 138 10 PCI-MSI aic79xx
201: 30 0 PCI-MSI aic79xx
225: 30 0 IO-APIC-level aic7xxx
233: 30 0 IO-APIC-level aic7xxx
NMI: 0 0
LOC: 324553 325068
ERR: 0
MIS: 0
6. MSI quirks
Several PCI chipsets or devices are known to not support MSI.
The PCI stack provides 3 possible levels of MSI disabling:
* on a single device
* on all devices behind a specific bridge
* globally
6.1. Disabling MSI on a single device
Under some circumstances it might be required to disable MSI on a
single device. This may be achieved by either not calling pci_enable_msi()
or all, or setting the pci_dev->no_msi flag before (most of the time
in a quirk).
6.2. Disabling MSI below a bridge
The vast majority of MSI quirks are required by PCI bridges not
being able to route MSI between busses. In this case, MSI have to be
disabled on all devices behind this bridge. It is achieves by setting
the PCI_BUS_FLAGS_NO_MSI flag in the pci_bus->bus_flags of the bridge
subordinate bus. There is no need to set the same flag on bridges that
are below the broken bridge. When pci_enable_msi() is called to enable
MSI on a device, pci_msi_supported() takes care of checking the NO_MSI
flag in all parent busses of the device.
Some bridges actually support dynamic MSI support enabling/disabling
by changing some bits in their PCI configuration space (especially
the Hypertransport chipsets such as the nVidia nForce and Serverworks
HT2000). It may then be required to update the NO_MSI flag on the
corresponding devices in the sysfs hierarchy. To enable MSI support
on device "0000:00:0e", do:
echo 1 > /sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:00:0e/msi_bus
To disable MSI support, echo 0 instead of 1. Note that it should be
used with caution since changing this value might break interrupts.
6.3. Disabling MSI globally
Some extreme cases may require to disable MSI globally on the system.
For now, the only known case is a Serverworks PCI-X chipsets (MSI are
not supported on several busses that are not all connected to the
chipset in the Linux PCI hierarchy). In the vast majority of other
cases, disabling only behind a specific bridge is enough.
For debugging purpose, the user may also pass pci=nomsi on the kernel
command-line to explicitly disable MSI globally. But, once the appro-
priate quirks are added to the kernel, this option should not be
required anymore.
6.4. Finding why MSI cannot be enabled on a device
Assuming that MSI are not enabled on a device, you should look at
dmesg to find messages that quirks may output when disabling MSI
on some devices, some bridges or even globally.
Then, lspci -t gives the list of bridges above a device. Reading
/sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:00:0e/msi_bus will tell you whether MSI
are enabled (1) or disabled (0). In 0 is found in a single bridge
msi_bus file above the device, MSI cannot be enabled.
7. FAQ
Q1. Are there any limitations on using the MSI?
A1. If the PCI device supports MSI and conforms to the
specification and the platform supports the APIC local bus,
then using MSI should work.
Q2. Will it work on all the Pentium processors (P3, P4, Xeon,
AMD processors)? In P3 IPI's are transmitted on the APIC local
bus and in P4 and Xeon they are transmitted on the system
bus. Are there any implications with this?
A2. MSI support enables a PCI device sending an inbound
memory write (0xfeexxxxx as target address) on its PCI bus
directly to the FSB. Since the message address has a
redirection hint bit cleared, it should work.
Q3. The target address 0xfeexxxxx will be translated by the
Host Bridge into an interrupt message. Are there any
limitations on the chipsets such as Intel 8xx, Intel e7xxx,
or VIA?
A3. If these chipsets support an inbound memory write with
target address set as 0xfeexxxxx, as conformed to PCI
specification 2.3 or latest, then it should work.
Q4. From the driver point of view, if the MSI is lost because
of errors occurring during inbound memory write, then it may
wait forever. Is there a mechanism for it to recover?
A4. Since the target of the transaction is an inbound memory
write, all transaction termination conditions (Retry,
Master-Abort, Target-Abort, or normal completion) are
supported. A device sending an MSI must abide by all the PCI
rules and conditions regarding that inbound memory write. So,
if a retry is signaled it must retry, etc... We believe that
the recommendation for Abort is also a retry (refer to PCI
specification 2.3 or latest).

4
Documentation/PCI/pci.txt
View File

@ -163,6 +163,10 @@ need pass only as many optional fields as necessary:
o class and classmask fields default to 0
o driver_data defaults to 0UL.
Note that driver_data must match the value used by any of the pci_device_id
entries defined in the driver. This makes the driver_data field mandatory
if all the pci_device_id entries have a non-zero driver_data value.
Once added, the driver probe routine will be invoked for any unclaimed
PCI devices listed in its (newly updated) pci_ids list.

11
Documentation/PCI/pcieaer-howto.txt
View File

@ -203,22 +203,17 @@ to mmio_enabled.
3.3 helper functions
3.3.1 int pci_find_aer_capability(struct pci_dev *dev);
pci_find_aer_capability locates the PCI Express AER capability
in the device configuration space. If the device doesn't support
PCI-Express AER, the function returns 0.
3.3.2 int pci_enable_pcie_error_reporting(struct pci_dev *dev);
3.3.1 int pci_enable_pcie_error_reporting(struct pci_dev *dev);
pci_enable_pcie_error_reporting enables the device to send error
messages to root port when an error is detected. Note that devices
don't enable the error reporting by default, so device drivers need
call this function to enable it.
3.3.3 int pci_disable_pcie_error_reporting(struct pci_dev *dev);
3.3.2 int pci_disable_pcie_error_reporting(struct pci_dev *dev);
pci_disable_pcie_error_reporting disables the device to send error
messages to root port when an error is detected.
3.3.4 int pci_cleanup_aer_uncorrect_error_status(struct pci_dev *dev);
3.3.3 int pci_cleanup_aer_uncorrect_error_status(struct pci_dev *dev);
pci_cleanup_aer_uncorrect_error_status cleanups the uncorrectable
error status register.

2
Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX
View File

@ -16,6 +16,8 @@ RTFP.txt
- List of RCU papers (bibliography) going back to 1980.
torture.txt
- RCU Torture Test Operation (CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST)
trace.txt
- CONFIG_RCU_TRACE debugfs files and formats
UP.txt
- RCU on Uniprocessor Systems
whatisRCU.txt

167
Documentation/RCU/rculist_nulls.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
Using hlist_nulls to protect read-mostly linked lists and
objects using SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU allocations.
Please read the basics in Documentation/RCU/listRCU.txt
Using special makers (called 'nulls') is a convenient way
to solve following problem :
A typical RCU linked list managing objects which are
allocated with SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU kmem_cache can
use following algos :
1) Lookup algo
--------------
rcu_read_lock()
begin:
obj = lockless_lookup(key);
if (obj) {
if (!try_get_ref(obj)) // might fail for free objects
goto begin;
/*
* Because a writer could delete object, and a writer could
* reuse these object before the RCU grace period, we
* must check key after geting the reference on object
*/
if (obj->key != key) { // not the object we expected
put_ref(obj);
goto begin;
}
}
rcu_read_unlock();
Beware that lockless_lookup(key) cannot use traditional hlist_for_each_entry_rcu()
but a version with an additional memory barrier (smp_rmb())
lockless_lookup(key)
{
struct hlist_node *node, *next;
for (pos = rcu_dereference((head)->first);
pos && ({ next = pos->next; smp_rmb(); prefetch(next); 1; }) &&
({ tpos = hlist_entry(pos, typeof(*tpos), member); 1; });
pos = rcu_dereference(next))
if (obj->key == key)
return obj;
return NULL;
And note the traditional hlist_for_each_entry_rcu() misses this smp_rmb() :
struct hlist_node *node;
for (pos = rcu_dereference((head)->first);
pos && ({ prefetch(pos->next); 1; }) &&
({ tpos = hlist_entry(pos, typeof(*tpos), member); 1; });
pos = rcu_dereference(pos->next))
if (obj->key == key)
return obj;
return NULL;
}
Quoting Corey Minyard :
"If the object is moved from one list to another list in-between the
time the hash is calculated and the next field is accessed, and the
object has moved to the end of a new list, the traversal will not
complete properly on the list it should have, since the object will
be on the end of the new list and there's not a way to tell it's on a
new list and restart the list traversal. I think that this can be
solved by pre-fetching the "next" field (with proper barriers) before
checking the key."
2) Insert algo :
----------------
We need to make sure a reader cannot read the new 'obj->obj_next' value
and previous value of 'obj->key'. Or else, an item could be deleted
from a chain, and inserted into another chain. If new chain was empty
before the move, 'next' pointer is NULL, and lockless reader can
not detect it missed following items in original chain.
/*
* Please note that new inserts are done at the head of list,
* not in the middle or end.
*/
obj = kmem_cache_alloc(...);
lock_chain(); // typically a spin_lock()
obj->key = key;
atomic_inc(&obj->refcnt);
/*
* we need to make sure obj->key is updated before obj->next
*/
smp_wmb();
hlist_add_head_rcu(&obj->obj_node, list);
unlock_chain(); // typically a spin_unlock()
3) Remove algo
--------------
Nothing special here, we can use a standard RCU hlist deletion.
But thanks to SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU, beware a deleted object can be reused
very very fast (before the end of RCU grace period)
if (put_last_reference_on(obj) {
lock_chain(); // typically a spin_lock()
hlist_del_init_rcu(&obj->obj_node);
unlock_chain(); // typically a spin_unlock()
kmem_cache_free(cachep, obj);
}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
With hlist_nulls we can avoid extra smp_rmb() in lockless_lookup()
and extra smp_wmb() in insert function.
For example, if we choose to store the slot number as the 'nulls'
end-of-list marker for each slot of the hash table, we can detect
a race (some writer did a delete and/or a move of an object
to another chain) checking the final 'nulls' value if
the lookup met the end of chain. If final 'nulls' value
is not the slot number, then we must restart the lookup at
the begining. If the object was moved to same chain,
then the reader doesnt care : It might eventually
scan the list again without harm.
1) lookup algo
head = &table[slot];
rcu_read_lock();
begin:
hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu(obj, node, head, member) {
if (obj->key == key) {
if (!try_get_ref(obj)) // might fail for free objects
goto begin;
if (obj->key != key) { // not the object we expected
put_ref(obj);
goto begin;
}
goto out;
}
/*
* if the nulls value we got at the end of this lookup is
* not the expected one, we must restart lookup.
* We probably met an item that was moved to another chain.
*/
if (get_nulls_value(node) != slot)
goto begin;
obj = NULL;
out:
rcu_read_unlock();
2) Insert function :
--------------------
/*
* Please note that new inserts are done at the head of list,
* not in the middle or end.
*/
obj = kmem_cache_alloc(cachep);
lock_chain(); // typically a spin_lock()
obj->key = key;
atomic_set(&obj->refcnt, 1);
/*
* insert obj in RCU way (readers might be traversing chain)
*/
hlist_nulls_add_head_rcu(&obj->obj_node, list);
unlock_chain(); // typically a spin_unlock()

413
Documentation/RCU/trace.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,413 @@
CONFIG_RCU_TRACE debugfs Files and Formats
The rcupreempt and rcutree implementations of RCU provide debugfs trace
output that summarizes counters and state. This information is useful for
debugging RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU.
Note that the rcuclassic implementation of RCU does not provide debugfs
trace output.
The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats for
preemptable RCU (rcupreempt) and hierarchical RCU (rcutree).
Preemptable RCU debugfs Files and Formats
This implementation of RCU provides three debugfs files under the
top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcuctrs (which displays the per-CPU
counters used by preemptable RCU) rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period
counters), and rcu/rcustats (which internal counters for debugging RCU).
The output of "cat rcu/rcuctrs" looks as follows:
CPU last cur F M
0 5 -5 0 0
1 -1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 1 0 0
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 0
6 0 2 0 0
7 0 -1 0 0
8 0 1 0 0
ggp = 26226, state = waitzero
The per-CPU fields are as follows:
o "CPU" gives the CPU number. Offline CPUs are not displayed.
o "last" gives the value of the counter that is being decremented
for the current grace period phase. In the example above,
the counters sum to 4, indicating that there are still four
RCU read-side critical sections still running that started
before the last counter flip.
o "cur" gives the value of the counter that is currently being
both incremented (by rcu_read_lock()) and decremented (by
rcu_read_unlock()). In the example above, the counters sum to
1, indicating that there is only one RCU read-side critical section
still running that started after the last counter flip.
o "F" indicates whether RCU is waiting for this CPU to acknowledge
a counter flip. In the above example, RCU is not waiting on any,
which is consistent with the state being "waitzero" rather than
"waitack".
o "M" indicates whether RCU is waiting for this CPU to execute a
memory barrier. In the above example, RCU is not waiting on any,
which is consistent with the state being "waitzero" rather than
"waitmb".
o "ggp" is the global grace-period counter.
o "state" is the RCU state, which can be one of the following:
o "idle": there is no grace period in progress.
o "waitack": RCU just incremented the global grace-period
counter, which has the effect of reversing the roles of
the "last" and "cur" counters above, and is waiting for
all the CPUs to acknowledge the flip. Once the flip has
been acknowledged, CPUs will no longer be incrementing
what are now the "last" counters, so that their sum will
decrease monotonically down to zero.
o "waitzero": RCU is waiting for the sum of the "last" counters
to decrease to zero.
o "waitmb": RCU is waiting for each CPU to execute a memory
barrier, which ensures that instructions from a given CPU's
last RCU read-side critical section cannot be reordered
with instructions following the memory-barrier instruction.
The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows:
oldggp=48870 newggp=48873
Note that reading from this file provokes a synchronize_rcu(). The
"oldggp" value is that of "ggp" from rcu/rcuctrs above, taken before
executing the synchronize_rcu(), and the "newggp" value is also the
"ggp" value, but taken after the synchronize_rcu() command returns.
The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows:
na=1337955 nl=40 wa=1337915 wl=44 da=1337871 dl=0 dr=1337871 di=1337871
1=50989 e1=6138 i1=49722 ie1=82 g1=49640 a1=315203 ae1=265563 a2=49640
z1=1401244 ze1=1351605 z2=49639 m1=5661253 me1=5611614 m2=49639
These are counters tracking internal preemptable-RCU events, however,
some of them may be useful for debugging algorithms using RCU. In
particular, the "nl", "wl", and "dl" values track the number of RCU
callbacks in various states. The fields are as follows:
o "na" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have been enqueued
since boot.
o "nl" is the number of RCU callbacks waiting for the previous
grace period to end so that they can start waiting on the next
grace period.
o "wa" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have started waiting
for a grace period since boot. "na" should be roughly equal to
"nl" plus "wa".
o "wl" is the number of RCU callbacks currently waiting for their
grace period to end.
o "da" is the total number of RCU callbacks whose grace periods
have completed since boot. "wa" should be roughly equal to
"wl" plus "da".
o "dr" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have been removed
from the list of callbacks ready to invoke. "dr" should be roughly
equal to "da".
o "di" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have been invoked
since boot. "di" should be roughly equal to "da", though some
early versions of preemptable RCU had a bug so that only the
last CPU's count of invocations was displayed, rather than the
sum of all CPU's counts.
o "1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip(). This should be
roughly equal to the sum of "e1", "i1", "a1", "z1", and "m1"
described below. In other words, the number of times that
the state machine is visited should be equal to the sum of the
number of times that each state is visited plus the number of
times that the state-machine lock acquisition failed.
o "e1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip() was unable to
acquire the fliplock.
o "i1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_idle().
o "ie1" is the number of times rcu_try_flip_idle() exited early
due to the calling CPU having no work for RCU.
o "g1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_idle() decided
to start a new grace period. "i1" should be roughly equal to
"ie1" plus "g1".
o "a1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_waitack().
o "ae1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitack() found
that at least one CPU had not yet acknowledge the new grace period
(AKA "counter flip").
o "a2" is the number of time rcu_try_flip_waitack() found that
all CPUs had acknowledged. "a1" should be roughly equal to
"ae1" plus "a2". (This particular output was collected on
a 128-CPU machine, hence the smaller-than-usual fraction of
calls to rcu_try_flip_waitack() finding all CPUs having already
acknowledged.)
o "z1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_waitzero().
o "ze1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitzero() found
that not all of the old RCU read-side critical sections had
completed.
o "z2" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitzero() finds
the sum of the counters equal to zero, in other words, that
all of the old RCU read-side critical sections had completed.
The value of "z1" should be roughly equal to "ze1" plus
"z2".
o "m1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_waitmb().
o "me1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitmb() finds
that at least one CPU has not yet executed a memory barrier.
o "m2" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitmb() finds that
all CPUs have executed a memory barrier.
Hierarchical RCU debugfs Files and Formats
This implementation of RCU provides three debugfs files under the
top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcudata (which displays fields in struct
rcu_data), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), and
rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy).
The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows:
rcu:
0 c=4011 g=4012 pq=1 pqc=4011 qp=0 rpfq=1 rp=3c2a dt=23301/73 dn=2 df=1882 of=0 ri=2126 ql=2 b=10
1 c=4011 g=4012 pq=1 pqc=4011 qp=0 rpfq=3 rp=39a6 dt=78073/1 dn=2 df=1402 of=0 ri=1875 ql=46 b=10
2 c=4010 g=4010 pq=1 pqc=4010 qp=0 rpfq=-5 rp=1d12 dt=16646/0 dn=2 df=3140 of=0 ri=2080 ql=0 b=10
3 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=2b50 dt=21159/1 dn=2 df=2230 of=0 ri=1923 ql=72 b=10
4 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=1644 dt=5783/1 dn=2 df=3348 of=0 ri=2805 ql=7 b=10
5 c=4012 g=4013 pq=0 pqc=4011 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=1aac dt=5879/1 dn=2 df=3140 of=0 ri=2066 ql=10 b=10
6 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=ed8 dt=5847/1 dn=2 df=3797 of=0 ri=1266 ql=10 b=10
7 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=1fa2 dt=6199/1 dn=2 df=2795 of=0 ri=2162 ql=28 b=10
rcu_bh:
0 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=0 rpfq=-145 rp=21d6 dt=23301/73 dn=2 df=0 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10
1 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-170 rp=20ce dt=78073/1 dn=2 df=26 of=0 ri=5 ql=0 b=10
2 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-83 rp=fbd dt=16646/0 dn=2 df=28 of=0 ri=4 ql=0 b=10
3 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=0 rpfq=-105 rp=178c dt=21159/1 dn=2 df=28 of=0 ri=2 ql=0 b=10
4 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-30 rp=b54 dt=5783/1 dn=2 df=32 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10
5 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-29 rp=df5 dt=5879/1 dn=2 df=30 of=0 ri=3 ql=0 b=10
6 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-28 rp=788 dt=5847/1 dn=2 df=32 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10
7 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-53 rp=1098 dt=6199/1 dn=2 df=30 of=0 ri=3 ql=0 b=10
The first section lists the rcu_data structures for rcu, the second for
rcu_bh. Each section has one line per CPU, or eight for this 8-CPU system.
The fields are as follows:
o The number at the beginning of each line is the CPU number.
CPUs numbers followed by an exclamation mark are offline,
but have been online at least once since boot. There will be
no output for CPUs that have never been online, which can be
a good thing in the surprisingly common case where NR_CPUS is
substantially larger than the number of actual CPUs.
o "c" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have
completed. CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag quite a ways
behind, for example, CPU 4 under "rcu" above, which has slept
through the past 25 RCU grace periods. It is not unusual to
see CPUs lagging by thousands of grace periods.
o "g" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have
started. Again, CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag behind.
If the "c" and "g" values are equal, this CPU has already
reported a quiescent state for the last RCU grace period that
it is aware of, otherwise, the CPU believes that it owes RCU a
quiescent state.
o "pq" indicates that this CPU has passed through a quiescent state
for the current grace period. It is possible for "pq" to be
"1" and "c" different than "g", which indicates that although
the CPU has passed through a quiescent state, either (1) this
CPU has not yet reported that fact, (2) some other CPU has not
yet reported for this grace period, or (3) both.
o "pqc" indicates which grace period the last-observed quiescent
state for this CPU corresponds to. This is important for handling
the race between CPU 0 reporting an extended dynticks-idle
quiescent state for CPU 1 and CPU 1 suddenly waking up and
reporting its own quiescent state. If CPU 1 was the last CPU
for the current grace period, then the CPU that loses this race
will attempt to incorrectly mark CPU 1 as having checked in for
the next grace period!
o "qp" indicates that RCU still expects a quiescent state from
this CPU.
o "rpfq" is the number of rcu_pending() calls on this CPU required
to induce this CPU to invoke force_quiescent_state().
o "rp" is low-order four hex digits of the count of how many times
rcu_pending() has been invoked on this CPU.
o "dt" is the current value of the dyntick counter that is incremented
when entering or leaving dynticks idle state, either by the
scheduler or by irq. The number after the "/" is the interrupt
nesting depth when in dyntick-idle state, or one greater than
the interrupt-nesting depth otherwise.
This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels.
o "dn" is the current value of the dyntick counter that is incremented
when entering or leaving dynticks idle state via NMI. If both
the "dt" and "dn" values are even, then this CPU is in dynticks
idle mode and may be ignored by RCU. If either of these two
counters is odd, then RCU must be alert to the possibility of
an RCU read-side critical section running on this CPU.
This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels.
o "df" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a
quiescent state on behalf of this CPU due to this CPU being in
dynticks-idle state.
This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels.
o "of" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a
quiescent state on behalf of this CPU due to this CPU being
offline. In a perfect world, this might neve happen, but it
turns out that offlining and onlining a CPU can take several grace
periods, and so there is likely to be an extended period of time
when RCU believes that the CPU is online when it really is not.
Please note that erring in the other direction (RCU believing a
CPU is offline when it is really alive and kicking) is a fatal
error, so it makes sense to err conservatively.
o "ri" is the number of times that RCU has seen fit to send a
reschedule IPI to this CPU in order to get it to report a
quiescent state.
o "ql" is the number of RCU callbacks currently residing on
this CPU. This is the total number of callbacks, regardless
of what state they are in (new, waiting for grace period to
start, waiting for grace period to end, ready to invoke).
o "b" is the batch limit for this CPU. If more than this number
of RCU callbacks is ready to invoke, then the remainder will
be deferred.
The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows:
rcu: completed=33062 gpnum=33063
rcu_bh: completed=464 gpnum=464
Again, this output is for both "rcu" and "rcu_bh". The fields are
taken from the rcu_state structure, and are as follows:
o "completed" is the number of grace periods that have completed.
It is comparable to the "c" field from rcu/rcudata in that a
CPU whose "c" field matches the value of "completed" is aware
that the corresponding RCU grace period has completed.
o "gpnum" is the number of grace periods that have started. It is
comparable to the "g" field from rcu/rcudata in that a CPU
whose "g" field matches the value of "gpnum" is aware that the
corresponding RCU grace period has started.
If these two fields are equal (as they are for "rcu_bh" above),
then there is no grace period in progress, in other words, RCU
is idle. On the other hand, if the two fields differ (as they
do for "rcu" above), then an RCU grace period is in progress.
The output of "cat rcu/rcuhier" looks as follows, with very long lines:
c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6
1/1 0:127 ^0
3/3 0:35 ^0 0/0 36:71 ^1 0/0 72:107 ^2 0/0 108:127 ^3
3/3f 0:5 ^0 2/3 6:11 ^1 0/0 12:17 ^2 0/0 18:23 ^3 0/0 24:29 ^4 0/0 30:35 ^5 0/0 36:41 ^0 0/0 42:47 ^1 0/0 48:53 ^2 0/0 54:59 ^3 0/0 60:65 ^4 0/0 66:71 ^5 0/0 72:77 ^0 0/0 78:83 ^1 0/0 84:89 ^2 0/0 90:95 ^3 0/0 96:101 ^4 0/0 102:107 ^5 0/0 108:113 ^0 0/0 114:119 ^1 0/0 120:125 ^2 0/0 126:127 ^3
rcu_bh:
c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0
0/1 0:127 ^0
0/3 0:35 ^0 0/0 36:71 ^1 0/0 72:107 ^2 0/0 108:127 ^3
0/3f 0:5 ^0 0/3 6:11 ^1 0/0 12:17 ^2 0/0 18:23 ^3 0/0 24:29 ^4 0/0 30:35 ^5 0/0 36:41 ^0 0/0 42:47 ^1 0/0 48:53 ^2 0/0 54:59 ^3 0/0 60:65 ^4 0/0 66:71 ^5 0/0 72:77 ^0 0/0 78:83 ^1 0/0 84:89 ^2 0/0 90:95 ^3 0/0 96:101 ^4 0/0 102:107 ^5 0/0 108:113 ^0 0/0 114:119 ^1 0/0 120:125 ^2 0/0 126:127 ^3
This is once again split into "rcu" and "rcu_bh" portions. The fields are
as follows:
o "c" is exactly the same as "completed" under rcu/rcugp.
o "g" is exactly the same as "gpnum" under rcu/rcugp.
o "s" is the "signaled" state that drives force_quiescent_state()'s
state machine.
o "jfq" is the number of jiffies remaining for this grace period
before force_quiescent_state() is invoked to help push things
along. Note that CPUs in dyntick-idle mode thoughout the grace
period will not report on their own, but rather must be check by
some other CPU via force_quiescent_state().
o "j" is the low-order four hex digits of the jiffies counter.
Yes, Paul did run into a number of problems that turned out to
be due to the jiffies counter no longer counting. Why do you ask?
o "nfqs" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() since
boot.
o "nfqsng" is the number of useless calls to force_quiescent_state(),
where there wasn't actually a grace period active. This can
happen due to races. The number in parentheses is the difference
between "nfqs" and "nfqsng", or the number of times that
force_quiescent_state() actually did some real work.
o "fqlh" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() that
exited immediately (without even being counted in nfqs above)
due to contention on ->fqslock.
o Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct
rcu_node. Each line represents one level of the hierarchy, from
root to leaves. It is best to think of the rcu_data structures
as forming yet another level after the leaves. Note that there
might be either one, two, or three levels of rcu_node structures,
depending on the relationship between CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT and
CONFIG_NR_CPUS.
o The numbers separated by the "/" are the qsmask followed
by the qsmaskinit. The qsmask will have one bit
set for each entity in the next lower level that
has not yet checked in for the current grace period.
The qsmaskinit will have one bit for each entity that is
currently expected to check in during each grace period.
The value of qsmaskinit is assigned to that of qsmask
at the beginning of each grace period.
For example, for "rcu", the qsmask of the first entry
of the lowest level is 0x14, meaning that we are still
waiting for CPUs 2 and 4 to check in for the current
grace period.
o The numbers separated by the ":" are the range of CPUs
served by this struct rcu_node. This can be helpful
in working out how the hierarchy is wired together.
For example, the first entry at the lowest level shows
"0:5", indicating that it covers CPUs 0 through 5.
o The number after the "^" indicates the bit in the
next higher level rcu_node structure that this
rcu_node structure corresponds to.
For example, the first entry at the lowest level shows
"^0", indicating that it corresponds to bit zero in
the first entry at the middle level.

2
Documentation/SAK.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Linux 2.4.2 Secure Attention Key (SAK) handling
18 March 2001, Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>
18 March 2001, Andrew Morton
An operating system's Secure Attention Key is a security tool which is
provided as protection against trojan password capturing programs. It

3
Documentation/SubmitChecklist
View File

@ -85,3 +85,6 @@ kernel patches.
23: Tested after it has been merged into the -mm patchset to make sure
that it still works with all of the other queued patches and various
changes in the VM, VFS, and other subsystems.
24: All memory barriers {e.g., barrier(), rmb(), wmb()} need a comment in the
source code that explains the logic of what they are doing and why.

2
Documentation/SubmittingDrivers
View File

@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Linux 2.4:
Linux 2.6:
The same rules apply as 2.4 except that you should follow linux-kernel
to track changes in API's. The final contact point for Linux 2.6
submissions is Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>.
submissions is Andrew Morton.
What Criteria Determine Acceptance
----------------------------------

11
Documentation/SubmittingPatches
View File

@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Quilt:
http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt
Andrew Morton's patch scripts:
http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/
http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/patch-scripts.tar.gz
Instead of these scripts, quilt is the recommended patch management
tool (see above).
@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ person it names. This tag documents that potentially interested parties
have been included in the discussion
14) Using Test-by: and Reviewed-by:
14) Using Tested-by: and Reviewed-by:
A Tested-by: tag indicates that the patch has been successfully tested (in
some environment) by the person named. This tag informs maintainers that
@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ SECTION 3 - REFERENCES
----------------------
Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
<http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt>
<http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt>
Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format".
<http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
@ -672,4 +672,9 @@ Kernel Documentation/CodingStyle:
Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format:
<http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
Andi Kleen, "On submitting kernel patches"
Some strategies to get difficult or controversal changes in.
http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf
--

1
Documentation/accounting/.gitignore vendored Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1 @@
getdelays

148
Documentation/acpi/debug.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
ACPI Debug Output
The ACPI CA, the Linux ACPI core, and some ACPI drivers can generate debug
output. This document describes how to use this facility.
Compile-time configuration
--------------------------
ACPI debug output is globally enabled by CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG. If this config
option is turned off, the debug messages are not even built into the
kernel.
Boot- and run-time configuration
--------------------------------
When CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG=y, you can select the component and level of messages
you're interested in. At boot-time, use the acpi.debug_layer and
acpi.debug_level kernel command line options. After boot, you can use the
debug_layer and debug_level files in /sys/module/acpi/parameters/ to control
the debug messages.
debug_layer (component)
-----------------------
The "debug_layer" is a mask that selects components of interest, e.g., a
specific driver or part of the ACPI interpreter. To build the debug_layer
bitmask, look for the "#define _COMPONENT" in an ACPI source file.
You can set the debug_layer mask at boot-time using the acpi.debug_layer
command line argument, and you can change it after boot by writing values
to /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer.
The possible components are defined in include/acpi/acoutput.h and
include/acpi/acpi_drivers.h. Reading /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer
shows the supported mask values, currently these:
ACPI_UTILITIES 0x00000001
ACPI_HARDWARE 0x00000002
ACPI_EVENTS 0x00000004
ACPI_TABLES 0x00000008
ACPI_NAMESPACE 0x00000010
ACPI_PARSER 0x00000020
ACPI_DISPATCHER 0x00000040
ACPI_EXECUTER 0x00000080
ACPI_RESOURCES 0x00000100
ACPI_CA_DEBUGGER 0x00000200
ACPI_OS_SERVICES 0x00000400
ACPI_CA_DISASSEMBLER 0x00000800
ACPI_COMPILER 0x00001000
ACPI_TOOLS 0x00002000
ACPI_BUS_COMPONENT 0x00010000
ACPI_AC_COMPONENT 0x00020000
ACPI_BATTERY_COMPONENT 0x00040000
ACPI_BUTTON_COMPONENT 0x00080000
ACPI_SBS_COMPONENT 0x00100000
ACPI_FAN_COMPONENT 0x00200000
ACPI_PCI_COMPONENT 0x00400000
ACPI_POWER_COMPONENT 0x00800000
ACPI_CONTAINER_COMPONENT 0x01000000
ACPI_SYSTEM_COMPONENT 0x02000000
ACPI_THERMAL_COMPONENT 0x04000000
ACPI_MEMORY_DEVICE_COMPONENT 0x08000000
ACPI_VIDEO_COMPONENT 0x10000000
ACPI_PROCESSOR_COMPONENT 0x20000000
debug_level
-----------
The "debug_level" is a mask that selects different types of messages, e.g.,
those related to initialization, method execution, informational messages, etc.
To build debug_level, look at the level specified in an ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT()
statement.
The ACPI interpreter uses several different levels, but the Linux
ACPI core and ACPI drivers generally only use ACPI_LV_INFO.
You can set the debug_level mask at boot-time using the acpi.debug_level
command line argument, and you can change it after boot by writing values
to /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level.
The possible levels are defined in include/acpi/acoutput.h. Reading
/sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level shows the supported mask values,
currently these:
ACPI_LV_INIT 0x00000001
ACPI_LV_DEBUG_OBJECT 0x00000002
ACPI_LV_INFO 0x00000004
ACPI_LV_INIT_NAMES 0x00000020
ACPI_LV_PARSE 0x00000040
ACPI_LV_LOAD 0x00000080
ACPI_LV_DISPATCH 0x00000100
ACPI_LV_EXEC 0x00000200
ACPI_LV_NAMES 0x00000400
ACPI_LV_OPREGION 0x00000800
ACPI_LV_BFIELD 0x00001000
ACPI_LV_TABLES 0x00002000
ACPI_LV_VALUES 0x00004000
ACPI_LV_OBJECTS 0x00008000
ACPI_LV_RESOURCES 0x00010000
ACPI_LV_USER_REQUESTS 0x00020000
ACPI_LV_PACKAGE 0x00040000
ACPI_LV_ALLOCATIONS 0x00100000
ACPI_LV_FUNCTIONS 0x00200000
ACPI_LV_OPTIMIZATIONS 0x00400000
ACPI_LV_MUTEX 0x01000000
ACPI_LV_THREADS 0x02000000
ACPI_LV_IO 0x04000000
ACPI_LV_INTERRUPTS 0x08000000
ACPI_LV_AML_DISASSEMBLE 0x10000000
ACPI_LV_VERBOSE_INFO 0x20000000
ACPI_LV_FULL_TABLES 0x40000000
ACPI_LV_EVENTS 0x80000000
Examples
--------
For example, drivers/acpi/bus.c contains this:
#define _COMPONENT ACPI_BUS_COMPONENT
...
ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT((ACPI_DB_INFO, "Device insertion detected\n"));
To turn on this message, set the ACPI_BUS_COMPONENT bit in acpi.debug_layer
and the ACPI_LV_INFO bit in acpi.debug_level. (The ACPI_DEBUG_PRINT
statement uses ACPI_DB_INFO, which is macro based on the ACPI_LV_INFO
definition.)
Enable all AML "Debug" output (stores to the Debug object while interpreting
AML) during boot:
acpi.debug_layer=0xffffffff acpi.debug_level=0x2
Enable PCI and PCI interrupt routing debug messages:
acpi.debug_layer=0x400000 acpi.debug_level=0x4
Enable all ACPI hardware-related messages:
acpi.debug_layer=0x2 acpi.debug_level=0xffffffff
Enable all ACPI_DB_INFO messages after boot:
# echo 0x4 > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level
Show all valid component values:
# cat /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer

13
Documentation/arm/empeg/README
View File

@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
Empeg, Ltd's Empeg MP3 Car Audio Player
The initial design is to go in your car, but you can use it at home, on a
boat... almost anywhere. The principle is to store CD-quality music using
MPEG technology onto a hard disk in the unit, and use the power of the
embedded computer to serve up the music you want.
For more details, see:
http://www.empeg.com

49
Documentation/arm/empeg/ir.txt
View File

@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
Infra-red driver documentation.
Mike Crowe <mac@empeg.com>
(C) Empeg Ltd 1999
Not a lot here yet :-)
The Kenwood KCA-R6A remote control generates a sequence like the following:
Go low for approx 16T (Around 9000us)
Go high for approx 8T (Around 4000us)
Go low for less than 2T (Around 750us)
For each of the 32 bits
Go high for more than 2T (Around 1500us) == 1
Go high for less than T (Around 400us) == 0
Go low for less than 2T (Around 750us)
Rather than repeat a signal when the button is held down certain buttons
generate the following code to indicate repetition.
Go low for approx 16T
Go high for approx 4T
Go low for less than 2T
(By removing the <2T from the start of the sequence and placing at the end
it can be considered a stop bit but I found it easier to deal with it at
the start).
The 32 bits are encoded as XxYy where x and y are the actual data values
while X and Y are the logical inverses of the associated data values. Using
LSB first yields sensible codes for the numbers.
All codes are of the form b9xx
The numeric keys generate the code 0x where x is the number pressed.
Tuner 1c
Tape 1d
CD 1e
CD-MD-CH 1f
Track- 0a
Track+ 0b
Rewind 0c
FF 0d
DNPP 5e
Play/Pause 0e
Vol+ 14
Vol- 15

11
Documentation/arm/empeg/mkdevs
View File

@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
#!/bin/sh
mknod /dev/display c 244 0
mknod /dev/ir c 242 0
mknod /dev/usb0 c 243 0
mknod /dev/audio c 245 4
mknod /dev/dsp c 245 3
mknod /dev/mixer c 245 0
mknod /dev/empeg_state c 246 0
mknod /dev/radio0 c 81 64
ln -sf radio0 radio
ln -sf usb0 usb

2
Documentation/arm/mem_alignment
View File

@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ real bad - it changes the behaviour of all unaligned instructions in user
space, and might cause programs to fail unexpectedly.
To change the alignment trap behavior, simply echo a number into
/proc/sys/debug/alignment. The number is made up from various bits:
/proc/cpu/alignment. The number is made up from various bits:
bit behavior when set
--- -----------------

286
Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,286 @@
MFP Configuration for PXA2xx/PXA3xx Processors
Eric Miao <eric.miao@marvell.com>
MFP stands for Multi-Function Pin, which is the pin-mux logic on PXA3xx and
later PXA series processors. This document describes the existing MFP API,
and how board/platform driver authors could make use of it.
Basic Concept
===============
Unlike the GPIO alternate function settings on PXA25x and PXA27x, a new MFP
mechanism is introduced from PXA3xx to completely move the pin-mux functions
out of the GPIO controller. In addition to pin-mux configurations, the MFP
also controls the low power state, driving strength, pull-up/down and event
detection of each pin. Below is a diagram of internal connections between
the MFP logic and the remaining SoC peripherals:
+--------+
| |--(GPIO19)--+
| GPIO | |
| |--(GPIO...) |
+--------+ |
| +---------+
+--------+ +------>| |
| PWM2 |--(PWM_OUT)-------->| MFP |
+--------+ +------>| |-------> to external PAD
| +---->| |
+--------+ | | +-->| |
| SSP2 |---(TXD)----+ | | +---------+
+--------+ | |
| |
+--------+ | |
| Keypad |--(MKOUT4)----+ |
+--------+ |
|
+--------+ |
| UART2 |---(TXD)--------+
+--------+
NOTE: the external pad is named as MFP_PIN_GPIO19, it doesn't necessarily
mean it's dedicated for GPIO19, only as a hint that internally this pin
can be routed from GPIO19 of the GPIO controller.
To better understand the change from PXA25x/PXA27x GPIO alternate function
to this new MFP mechanism, here are several key points:
1. GPIO controller on PXA3xx is now a dedicated controller, same as other
internal controllers like PWM, SSP and UART, with 128 internal signals
which can be routed to external through one or more MFPs (e.g. GPIO<0>
can be routed through either MFP_PIN_GPIO0 as well as MFP_PIN_GPIO0_2,
see arch/arm/mach-pxa/mach/include/mfp-pxa300.h)
2. Alternate function configuration is removed from this GPIO controller,
the remaining functions are pure GPIO-specific, i.e.
- GPIO signal level control
- GPIO direction control
- GPIO level change detection
3. Low power state for each pin is now controlled by MFP, this means the
PGSRx registers on PXA2xx are now useless on PXA3xx
4. Wakeup detection is now controlled by MFP, PWER does not control the
wakeup from GPIO(s) any more, depending on the sleeping state, ADxER
(as defined in pxa3xx-regs.h) controls the wakeup from MFP
NOTE: with such a clear separation of MFP and GPIO, by GPIO<xx> we normally
mean it is a GPIO signal, and by MFP<xxx> or pin xxx, we mean a physical
pad (or ball).
MFP API Usage
===============
For board code writers, here are some guidelines:
1. include ONE of the following header files in your <board>.c:
- #include <mach/mfp-pxa25x.h>
- #include <mach/mfp-pxa27x.h>
- #include <mach/mfp-pxa300.h>
- #include <mach/mfp-pxa320.h>
- #include <mach/mfp-pxa930.h>
NOTE: only one file in your <board>.c, depending on the processors used,
because pin configuration definitions may conflict in these file (i.e.
same name, different meaning and settings on different processors). E.g.
for zylonite platform, which support both PXA300/PXA310 and PXA320, two
separate files are introduced: zylonite_pxa300.c and zylonite_pxa320.c
(in addition to handle MFP configuration differences, they also handle
the other differences between the two combinations).
NOTE: PXA300 and PXA310 are almost identical in pin configurations (with
PXA310 supporting some additional ones), thus the difference is actually
covered in a single mfp-pxa300.h.
2. prepare an array for the initial pin configurations, e.g.:
static unsigned long mainstone_pin_config[] __initdata = {
/* Chip Select */
GPIO15_nCS_1,
/* LCD - 16bpp Active TFT */
GPIOxx_TFT_LCD_16BPP,
GPIO16_PWM0_OUT, /* Backlight */
/* MMC */
GPIO32_MMC_CLK,
GPIO112_MMC_CMD,
GPIO92_MMC_DAT_0,
GPIO109_MMC_DAT_1,
GPIO110_MMC_DAT_2,
GPIO111_MMC_DAT_3,
...
/* GPIO */
GPIO1_GPIO | WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_BOTH,
};
a) once the pin configurations are passed to pxa{2xx,3xx}_mfp_config(),
and written to the actual registers, they are useless and may discard,
adding '__initdata' will help save some additional bytes here.
b) when there is only one possible pin configurations for a component,
some simplified definitions can be used, e.g. GPIOxx_TFT_LCD_16BPP on
PXA25x and PXA27x processors
c) if by board design, a pin can be configured to wake up the system
from low power state, it can be 'OR'ed with any of:
WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_BOTH
WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_RISE
WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_FALL
WAKEUP_ON_LEVEL_HIGH - specifically for enabling of keypad GPIOs,
to indicate that this pin has the capability of wake-up the system,
and on which edge(s). This, however, doesn't necessarily mean the
pin _will_ wakeup the system, it will only when set_irq_wake() is
invoked with the corresponding GPIO IRQ (GPIO_IRQ(xx) or gpio_to_irq())
and eventually calls gpio_set_wake() for the actual register setting.
d) although PXA3xx MFP supports edge detection on each pin, the
internal logic will only wakeup the system when those specific bits
in ADxER registers are set, which can be well mapped to the
corresponding peripheral, thus set_irq_wake() can be called with
the peripheral IRQ to enable the wakeup.
MFP on PXA3xx
===============
Every external I/O pad on PXA3xx (excluding those for special purpose) has
one MFP logic associated, and is controlled by one MFP register (MFPR).
The MFPR has the following bit definitions (for PXA300/PXA310/PXA320):
31 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
+-------------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
| RESERVED |PS|PU|PD| DRIVE |SS|SD|SO|EC|EF|ER|--| AF_SEL |
+-------------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
Bit 3: RESERVED
Bit 4: EDGE_RISE_EN - enable detection of rising edge on this pin
Bit 5: EDGE_FALL_EN - enable detection of falling edge on this pin
Bit 6: EDGE_CLEAR - disable edge detection on this pin
Bit 7: SLEEP_OE_N - enable outputs during low power modes
Bit 8: SLEEP_DATA - output data on the pin during low power modes
Bit 9: SLEEP_SEL - selection control for low power modes signals
Bit 13: PULLDOWN_EN - enable the internal pull-down resistor on this pin
Bit 14: PULLUP_EN - enable the internal pull-up resistor on this pin
Bit 15: PULL_SEL - pull state controlled by selected alternate function
(0) or by PULL{UP,DOWN}_EN bits (1)
Bit 0 - 2: AF_SEL - alternate function selection, 8 possibilities, from 0-7
Bit 10-12: DRIVE - drive strength and slew rate
0b000 - fast 1mA
0b001 - fast 2mA
0b002 - fast 3mA
0b003 - fast 4mA
0b004 - slow 6mA
0b005 - fast 6mA
0b006 - slow 10mA
0b007 - fast 10mA
MFP Design for PXA2xx/PXA3xx
==============================
Due to the difference of pin-mux handling between PXA2xx and PXA3xx, a unified
MFP API is introduced to cover both series of processors.
The basic idea of this design is to introduce definitions for all possible pin
configurations, these definitions are processor and platform independent, and
the actual API invoked to convert these definitions into register settings and
make them effective there-after.
Files Involved
--------------
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp.h
for
1. Unified pin definitions - enum constants for all configurable pins
2. processor-neutral bit definitions for a possible MFP configuration
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa3xx.h
for PXA3xx specific MFPR register bit definitions and PXA3xx common pin
configurations
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa2xx.h
for PXA2xx specific definitions and PXA25x/PXA27x common pin configurations
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa25x.h
arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa27x.h
arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa300.h
arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa320.h
arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa930.h
for processor specific definitions
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/mfp-pxa3xx.c
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/mfp-pxa2xx.c
for implementation of the pin configuration to take effect for the actual
processor.
Pin Configuration
-----------------
The following comments are copied from mfp.h (see the actual source code
for most updated info)
/*
* a possible MFP configuration is represented by a 32-bit integer
*
* bit 0.. 9 - MFP Pin Number (1024 Pins Maximum)
* bit 10..12 - Alternate Function Selection
* bit 13..15 - Drive Strength
* bit 16..18 - Low Power Mode State
* bit 19..20 - Low Power Mode Edge Detection
* bit 21..22 - Run Mode Pull State
*
* to facilitate the definition, the following macros are provided
*
* MFP_CFG_DEFAULT - default MFP configuration value, with
* alternate function = 0,
* drive strength = fast 3mA (MFP_DS03X)
* low power mode = default
* edge detection = none
*
* MFP_CFG - default MFPR value with alternate function
* MFP_CFG_DRV - default MFPR value with alternate function and
* pin drive strength
* MFP_CFG_LPM - default MFPR value with alternate function and
* low power mode
* MFP_CFG_X - default MFPR value with alternate function,
* pin drive strength and low power mode
*/
Examples of pin configurations are:
#define GPIO94_SSP3_RXD MFP_CFG_X(GPIO94, AF1, DS08X, FLOAT)
which reads GPIO94 can be configured as SSP3_RXD, with alternate function
selection of 1, driving strength of 0b101, and a float state in low power
modes.
NOTE: this is the default setting of this pin being configured as SSP3_RXD
which can be modified a bit in board code, though it is not recommended to
do so, simply because this default setting is usually carefully encoded,
and is supposed to work in most cases.
Register Settings
-----------------
Register settings on PXA3xx for a pin configuration is actually very
straight-forward, most bits can be converted directly into MFPR value
in a easier way. Two sets of MFPR values are calculated: the run-time
ones and the low power mode ones, to allow different settings.
The conversion from a generic pin configuration to the actual register
settings on PXA2xx is a bit complicated: many registers are involved,
including GAFRx, GPDRx, PGSRx, PWER, PKWR, PFER and PRER. Please see
mfp-pxa2xx.c for how the conversion is made.

1
Documentation/auxdisplay/.gitignore vendored Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1 @@
cfag12864b-example

6
Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
View File

@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ I/O scheduler, a.k.a. elevator, is implemented in two layers. Generic dispatch
queue and specific I/O schedulers. Unless stated otherwise, elevator is used
to refer to both parts and I/O scheduler to specific I/O schedulers.
Block layer implements generic dispatch queue in ll_rw_blk.c and elevator.c.
Block layer implements generic dispatch queue in block/*.c.
The generic dispatch queue is responsible for properly ordering barrier
requests, requeueing, handling non-fs requests and all other subtleties.
@ -926,8 +926,8 @@ be built inside the kernel. Each queue can choose different one and can also
change to another one dynamically.
A block layer call to the i/o scheduler follows the convention elv_xxx(). This
calls elevator_xxx_fn in the elevator switch (drivers/block/elevator.c). Oh,
xxx and xxx might not match exactly, but use your imagination. If an elevator
calls elevator_xxx_fn in the elevator switch (block/elevator.c). Oh, xxx
and xxx might not match exactly, but use your imagination. If an elevator
doesn't implement a function, the switch does nothing or some minimal house
keeping work.

4
Documentation/block/data-integrity.txt
View File

@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ will require extra work due to the application tag.
retrieve the tag buffer using bio_integrity_get_tag().
6.3 PASSING EXISTING INTEGRITY METADATA
5.3 PASSING EXISTING INTEGRITY METADATA
Filesystems that either generate their own integrity metadata or
are capable of transferring IMD from user space can use the
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ will require extra work due to the application tag.
integrity upon completion.
6.4 REGISTERING A BLOCK DEVICE AS CAPABLE OF EXCHANGING INTEGRITY
5.4 REGISTERING A BLOCK DEVICE AS CAPABLE OF EXCHANGING INTEGRITY
METADATA
To enable integrity exchange on a block device the gendisk must be

16
Documentation/blockdev/00-INDEX Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
00-INDEX
- this file
README.DAC960
- info on Mylex DAC960/DAC1100 PCI RAID Controller Driver for Linux.
cciss.txt
- info, major/minor #'s for Compaq's SMART Array Controllers.
cpqarray.txt
- info on using Compaq's SMART2 Intelligent Disk Array Controllers.
floppy.txt
- notes and driver options for the floppy disk driver.
nbd.txt
- info on a TCP implementation of a network block device.
paride.txt
- information about the parallel port IDE subsystem.
ramdisk.txt
- short guide on how to set up and use the RAM disk.

0
Documentation/README.DAC960 → Documentation/blockdev/README.DAC960
View File

171
Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
This driver is for Compaq's SMART Array Controllers.
Supported Cards:
----------------
This driver is known to work with the following cards:
* SA 5300
* SA 5i
* SA 532
* SA 5312
* SA 641
* SA 642
* SA 6400
* SA 6400 U320 Expansion Module
* SA 6i
* SA P600
* SA P800
* SA E400
* SA P400i
* SA E200
* SA E200i
* SA E500
* SA P700m
* SA P212
* SA P410
* SA P410i
* SA P411
* SA P812
* SA P712m
* SA P711m
Detecting drive failures:
-------------------------
To get the status of logical volumes and to detect physical drive
failures, you can use the cciss_vol_status program found here:
http://cciss.sourceforge.net/#cciss_utils
Device Naming:
--------------
If nodes are not already created in the /dev/cciss directory, run as root:
# cd /dev
# ./MAKEDEV cciss
You need some entries in /dev for the cciss device. The MAKEDEV script
can make device nodes for you automatically. Currently the device setup
is as follows:
Major numbers:
104 cciss0
105 cciss1
106 cciss2
105 cciss3
108 cciss4
109 cciss5
110 cciss6
111 cciss7
Minor numbers:
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
|----+----| |----+----|
| |
| +-------- Partition ID (0=wholedev, 1-15 partition)
|
+-------------------- Logical Volume number
The device naming scheme is:
/dev/cciss/c0d0 Controller 0, disk 0, whole device
/dev/cciss/c0d0p1 Controller 0, disk 0, partition 1
/dev/cciss/c0d0p2 Controller 0, disk 0, partition 2
/dev/cciss/c0d0p3 Controller 0, disk 0, partition 3
/dev/cciss/c1d1 Controller 1, disk 1, whole device
/dev/cciss/c1d1p1 Controller 1, disk 1, partition 1
/dev/cciss/c1d1p2 Controller 1, disk 1, partition 2
/dev/cciss/c1d1p3 Controller 1, disk 1, partition 3
SCSI tape drive and medium changer support
------------------------------------------
SCSI sequential access devices and medium changer devices are supported and
appropriate device nodes are automatically created. (e.g.
/dev/st0, /dev/st1, etc. See the "st" man page for more details.)
You must enable "SCSI tape drive support for Smart Array 5xxx" and
"SCSI support" in your kernel configuration to be able to use SCSI
tape drives with your Smart Array 5xxx controller.
Additionally, note that the driver will not engage the SCSI core at init
time. The driver must be directed to dynamically engage the SCSI core via
the /proc filesystem entry which the "block" side of the driver creates as
/proc/driver/cciss/cciss* at runtime. This is because at driver init time,
the SCSI core may not yet be initialized (because the driver is a block
driver) and attempting to register it with the SCSI core in such a case
would cause a hang. This is best done via an initialization script
(typically in /etc/init.d, but could vary depending on distribution).
For example:
for x in /proc/driver/cciss/cciss[0-9]*
do
echo "engage scsi" > $x
done
Once the SCSI core is engaged by the driver, it cannot be disengaged
(except by unloading the driver, if it happens to be linked as a module.)
Note also that if no sequential access devices or medium changers are
detected, the SCSI core will not be engaged by the action of the above
script.
Hot plug support for SCSI tape drives
-------------------------------------
Hot plugging of SCSI tape drives is supported, with some caveats.
The cciss driver must be informed that changes to the SCSI bus
have been made. This may be done via the /proc filesystem.
For example:
echo "rescan" > /proc/scsi/cciss0/1
This causes the driver to query the adapter about changes to the
physical SCSI buses and/or fibre channel arbitrated loop and the
driver to make note of any new or removed sequential access devices
or medium changers. The driver will output messages indicating what
devices have been added or removed and the controller, bus, target and
lun used to address the device. It then notifies the SCSI mid layer
of these changes.
Note that the naming convention of the /proc filesystem entries
contains a number in addition to the driver name. (E.g. "cciss0"
instead of just "cciss" which you might expect.)
Note: ONLY sequential access devices and medium changers are presented
as SCSI devices to the SCSI mid layer by the cciss driver. Specifically,
physical SCSI disk drives are NOT presented to the SCSI mid layer. The
physical SCSI disk drives are controlled directly by the array controller
hardware and it is important to prevent the kernel from attempting to directly
access these devices too, as if the array controller were merely a SCSI
controller in the same way that we are allowing it to access SCSI tape drives.
SCSI error handling for tape drives and medium changers
-------------------------------------------------------
The linux SCSI mid layer provides an error handling protocol which
kicks into gear whenever a SCSI command fails to complete within a
certain amount of time (which can vary depending on the command).
The cciss driver participates in this protocol to some extent. The
normal protocol is a four step process. First the device is told
to abort the command. If that doesn't work, the device is reset.
If that doesn't work, the SCSI bus is reset. If that doesn't work
the host bus adapter is reset. Because the cciss driver is a block
driver as well as a SCSI driver and only the tape drives and medium
changers are presented to the SCSI mid layer, and unlike more
straightforward SCSI drivers, disk i/o continues through the block
side during the SCSI error recovery process, the cciss driver only
implements the first two of these actions, aborting the command, and
resetting the device. Additionally, most tape drives will not oblige
in aborting commands, and sometimes it appears they will not even
obey a reset command, though in most circumstances they will. In
the case that the command cannot be aborted and the device cannot be
reset, the device will be set offline.
In the event the error handling code is triggered and a tape drive is
successfully reset or the tardy command is successfully aborted, the
tape drive may still not allow i/o to continue until some command
is issued which positions the tape to a known position. Typically you
must rewind the tape (by issuing "mt -f /dev/st0 rewind" for example)
before i/o can proceed again to a tape drive which was reset.

0
Documentation/cpqarray.txt → Documentation/blockdev/cpqarray.txt
View File

0
Documentation/floppy.txt → Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt
View File

0
Documentation/nbd.txt → Documentation/blockdev/nbd.txt
View File

0
Documentation/paride.txt → Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt
View File

0
Documentation/ramdisk.txt → Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt
View File

90
Documentation/c2port.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
C2 port support
---------------
(C) Copyright 2007 Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@enneenne.com>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
Overview
--------
This driver implements the support for Linux of Silicon Labs (Silabs)
C2 Interface used for in-system programming of micro controllers.
By using this driver you can reprogram the in-system flash without EC2
or EC3 debug adapter. This solution is also useful in those systems
where the micro controller is connected via special GPIOs pins.
References
----------
The C2 Interface main references are at (http://www.silabs.com)
Silicon Laboratories site], see:
- AN127: FLASH Programming via the C2 Interface at
http://www.silabs.com/public/documents/tpub_doc/anote/Microcontrollers/Small_Form_Factor/en/an127.pdf, and
- C2 Specification at
http://www.silabs.com/public/documents/tpub_doc/spec/Microcontrollers/en/C2spec.pdf,
however it implements a two wire serial communication protocol (bit
banging) designed to enable in-system programming, debugging, and
boundary-scan testing on low pin-count Silicon Labs devices. Currently
this code supports only flash programming but extensions are easy to
add.
Using the driver
----------------
Once the driver is loaded you can use sysfs support to get C2port's
info or read/write in-system flash.
# ls /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/
access flash_block_size flash_erase rev_id
dev_id flash_blocks_num flash_size subsystem/
flash_access flash_data reset uevent
Initially the C2port access is disabled since you hardware may have
such lines multiplexed with other devices so, to get access to the
C2port, you need the command:
# echo 1 > /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/access
after that you should read the device ID and revision ID of the
connected micro controller:
# cat /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/dev_id
8
# cat /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/rev_id
1
However, for security reasons, the in-system flash access in not
enabled yet, to do so you need the command:
# echo 1 > /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/flash_access
After that you can read the whole flash:
# cat /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/flash_data > image
erase it:
# echo 1 > /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/flash_erase
and write it:
# cat image > /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/flash_data
after writing you have to reset the device to execute the new code:
# echo 1 > /sys/class/c2port/c2port0/reset

168
Documentation/cciss.txt
View File

@ -1,168 +0,0 @@
This driver is for Compaq's SMART Array Controllers.
Supported Cards:
----------------
This driver is known to work with the following cards:
* SA 5300
* SA 5i
* SA 532
* SA 5312
* SA 641
* SA 642
* SA 6400
* SA 6400 U320 Expansion Module
* SA 6i
* SA P600
* SA P800
* SA E400
* SA P400i
* SA E200
* SA E200i
* SA E500
* SA P212
* SA P410
* SA P410i
* SA P411
* SA P812
Detecting drive failures:
-------------------------
To get the status of logical volumes and to detect physical drive
failures, you can use the cciss_vol_status program found here:
http://cciss.sourceforge.net/#cciss_utils
Device Naming:
--------------
If nodes are not already created in the /dev/cciss directory, run as root:
# cd /dev
# ./MAKEDEV cciss
You need some entries in /dev for the cciss device. The MAKEDEV script
can make device nodes for you automatically. Currently the device setup
is as follows:
Major numbers:
104 cciss0
105 cciss1
106 cciss2
105 cciss3
108 cciss4
109 cciss5
110 cciss6
111 cciss7
Minor numbers:
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
|----+----| |----+----|
| |
| +-------- Partition ID (0=wholedev, 1-15 partition)
|
+-------------------- Logical Volume number
The device naming scheme is:
/dev/cciss/c0d0 Controller 0, disk 0, whole device
/dev/cciss/c0d0p1 Controller 0, disk 0, partition 1
/dev/cciss/c0d0p2 Controller 0, disk 0, partition 2
/dev/cciss/c0d0p3 Controller 0, disk 0, partition 3
/dev/cciss/c1d1 Controller 1, disk 1, whole device
/dev/cciss/c1d1p1 Controller 1, disk 1, partition 1
/dev/cciss/c1d1p2 Controller 1, disk 1, partition 2
/dev/cciss/c1d1p3 Controller 1, disk 1, partition 3
SCSI tape drive and medium changer support
------------------------------------------
SCSI sequential access devices and medium changer devices are supported and
appropriate device nodes are automatically created. (e.g.
/dev/st0, /dev/st1, etc. See the "st" man page for more details.)
You must enable "SCSI tape drive support for Smart Array 5xxx" and
"SCSI support" in your kernel configuration to be able to use SCSI
tape drives with your Smart Array 5xxx controller.
Additionally, note that the driver will not engage the SCSI core at init
time. The driver must be directed to dynamically engage the SCSI core via
the /proc filesystem entry which the "block" side of the driver creates as
/proc/driver/cciss/cciss* at runtime. This is because at driver init time,
the SCSI core may not yet be initialized (because the driver is a block
driver) and attempting to register it with the SCSI core in such a case
would cause a hang. This is best done via an initialization script
(typically in /etc/init.d, but could vary depending on distribution).
For example:
for x in /proc/driver/cciss/cciss[0-9]*
do
echo "engage scsi" > $x
done
Once the SCSI core is engaged by the driver, it cannot be disengaged
(except by unloading the driver, if it happens to be linked as a module.)
Note also that if no sequential access devices or medium changers are
detected, the SCSI core will not be engaged by the action of the above
script.
Hot plug support for SCSI tape drives
-------------------------------------
Hot plugging of SCSI tape drives is supported, with some caveats.
The cciss driver must be informed that changes to the SCSI bus
have been made. This may be done via the /proc filesystem.
For example:
echo "rescan" > /proc/scsi/cciss0/1
This causes the driver to query the adapter about changes to the
physical SCSI buses and/or fibre channel arbitrated loop and the
driver to make note of any new or removed sequential access devices
or medium changers. The driver will output messages indicating what
devices have been added or removed and the controller, bus, target and
lun used to address the device. It then notifies the SCSI mid layer
of these changes.
Note that the naming convention of the /proc filesystem entries
contains a number in addition to the driver name. (E.g. "cciss0"
instead of just "cciss" which you might expect.)
Note: ONLY sequential access devices and medium changers are presented
as SCSI devices to the SCSI mid layer by the cciss driver. Specifically,
physical SCSI disk drives are NOT presented to the SCSI mid layer. The
physical SCSI disk drives are controlled directly by the array controller
hardware and it is important to prevent the kernel from attempting to directly
access these devices too, as if the array controller were merely a SCSI
controller in the same way that we are allowing it to access SCSI tape drives.
SCSI error handling for tape drives and medium changers
-------------------------------------------------------
The linux SCSI mid layer provides an error handling protocol which
kicks into gear whenever a SCSI command fails to complete within a
certain amount of time (which can vary depending on the command).
The cciss driver participates in this protocol to some extent. The
normal protocol is a four step process. First the device is told
to abort the command. If that doesn't work, the device is reset.
If that doesn't work, the SCSI bus is reset. If that doesn't work
the host bus adapter is reset. Because the cciss driver is a block
driver as well as a SCSI driver and only the tape drives and medium
changers are presented to the SCSI mid layer, and unlike more
straightforward SCSI drivers, disk i/o continues through the block
side during the SCSI error recovery process, the cciss driver only
implements the first two of these actions, aborting the command, and
resetting the device. Additionally, most tape drives will not oblige
in aborting commands, and sometimes it appears they will not even
obey a reset command, though in most circumstances they will. In
the case that the command cannot be aborted and the device cannot be
reset, the device will be set offline.
In the event the error handling code is triggered and a tape drive is
successfully reset or the tardy command is successfully aborted, the
tape drive may still not allow i/o to continue until some command
is issued which positions the tape to a known position. Typically you
must rewind the tape (by issuing "mt -f /dev/st0 rewind" for example)
before i/o can proceed again to a tape drive which was reset.

0
Documentation/cgroups.txt → Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
View File

102
Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
The cgroup freezer is useful to batch job management system which start
and stop sets of tasks in order to schedule the resources of a machine
according to the desires of a system administrator. This sort of program
is often used on HPC clusters to schedule access to the cluster as a
whole. The cgroup freezer uses cgroups to describe the set of tasks to
be started/stopped by the batch job management system. It also provides
a means to start and stop the tasks composing the job.
The cgroup freezer will also be useful for checkpointing running groups
of tasks. The freezer allows the checkpoint code to obtain a consistent
image of the tasks by attempting to force the tasks in a cgroup into a
quiescent state. Once the tasks are quiescent another task can
walk /proc or invoke a kernel interface to gather information about the
quiesced tasks. Checkpointed tasks can be restarted later should a
recoverable error occur. This also allows the checkpointed tasks to be
migrated between nodes in a cluster by copying the gathered information
to another node and restarting the tasks there.
Sequences of SIGSTOP and SIGCONT are not always sufficient for stopping
and resuming tasks in userspace. Both of these signals are observable
from within the tasks we wish to freeze. While SIGSTOP cannot be caught,
blocked, or ignored it can be seen by waiting or ptracing parent tasks.
SIGCONT is especially unsuitable since it can be caught by the task. Any
programs designed to watch for SIGSTOP and SIGCONT could be broken by
attempting to use SIGSTOP and SIGCONT to stop and resume tasks. We can
demonstrate this problem using nested bash shells:
$ echo $$
16644
$ bash
$ echo $$
16690
From a second, unrelated bash shell:
$ kill -SIGSTOP 16690
$ kill -SIGCONT 16990
<at this point 16990 exits and causes 16644 to exit too>
This happens because bash can observe both signals and choose how it
responds to them.
Another example of a program which catches and responds to these
signals is gdb. In fact any program designed to use ptrace is likely to
have a problem with this method of stopping and resuming tasks.
In contrast, the cgroup freezer uses the kernel freezer code to
prevent the freeze/unfreeze cycle from becoming visible to the tasks
being frozen. This allows the bash example above and gdb to run as
expected.
The freezer subsystem in the container filesystem defines a file named
freezer.state. Writing "FROZEN" to the state file will freeze all tasks in the
cgroup. Subsequently writing "THAWED" will unfreeze the tasks in the cgroup.
Reading will return the current state.
Note freezer.state doesn't exist in root cgroup, which means root cgroup
is non-freezable.
* Examples of usage :
# mkdir /containers
# mount -t cgroup -ofreezer freezer /containers
# mkdir /containers/0
# echo $some_pid > /containers/0/tasks
to get status of the freezer subsystem :
# cat /containers/0/freezer.state
THAWED
to freeze all tasks in the container :
# echo FROZEN > /containers/0/freezer.state
# cat /containers/0/freezer.state
FREEZING
# cat /containers/0/freezer.state
FROZEN
to unfreeze all tasks in the container :
# echo THAWED > /containers/0/freezer.state
# cat /containers/0/freezer.state
THAWED
This is the basic mechanism which should do the right thing for user space task
in a simple scenario.
It's important to note that freezing can be incomplete. In that case we return
EBUSY. This means that some tasks in the cgroup are busy doing something that
prevents us from completely freezing the cgroup at this time. After EBUSY,
the cgroup will remain partially frozen -- reflected by freezer.state reporting
"FREEZING" when read. The state will remain "FREEZING" until one of these
things happens:
1) Userspace cancels the freezing operation by writing "THAWED" to
the freezer.state file
2) Userspace retries the freezing operation by writing "FROZEN" to
the freezer.state file (writing "FREEZING" is not legal
and returns EINVAL)
3) The tasks that blocked the cgroup from entering the "FROZEN"
state disappear from the cgroup's set of tasks.

522
Documentation/computone.txt
View File

@ -1,522 +0,0 @@
NOTE: This is an unmaintained driver. It is not guaranteed to work due to
changes made in the tty layer in 2.6. If you wish to take over maintenance of
this driver, contact Michael Warfield <mhw@wittsend.com>.
Changelog:
----------
11-01-2001: Original Document
10-29-2004: Minor misspelling & format fix, update status of driver.
James Nelson <james4765@gmail.com>
Computone Intelliport II/Plus Multiport Serial Driver
-----------------------------------------------------
Release Notes For Linux Kernel 2.2 and higher.
These notes are for the drivers which have already been integrated into the
kernel and have been tested on Linux kernels 2.0, 2.2, 2.3, and 2.4.
Version: 1.2.14
Date: 11/01/2001
Historical Author: Andrew Manison <amanison@america.net>
Primary Author: Doug McNash
Support: support@computone.com
Fixes and Updates: Mike Warfield <mhw@wittsend.com>
This file assumes that you are using the Computone drivers which are
integrated into the kernel sources. For updating the drivers or installing
drivers into kernels which do not already have Computone drivers, please
refer to the instructions in the README.computone file in the driver patch.
1. INTRODUCTION
This driver supports the entire family of Intelliport II/Plus controllers
with the exception of the MicroChannel controllers. It does not support
products previous to the Intelliport II.
This driver was developed on the v2.0.x Linux tree and has been tested up
to v2.4.14; it will probably not work with earlier v1.X kernels,.
2. QUICK INSTALLATION
Hardware - If you have an ISA card, find a free interrupt and io port.
List those in use with `cat /proc/interrupts` and
`cat /proc/ioports`. Set the card dip switches to a free
address. You may need to configure your BIOS to reserve an
irq for an ISA card. PCI and EISA parameters are set
automagically. Insert card into computer with the power off
before or after drivers installation.
Note the hardware address from the Computone ISA cards installed into
the system. These are required for editing ip2.c or editing
/etc/modprobe.conf, or for specification on the modprobe
command line.
Note that the /etc/modules.conf should be used for older (pre-2.6)
kernels.
Software -
Module installation:
a) Determine free irq/address to use if any (configure BIOS if need be)
b) Run "make config" or "make menuconfig" or "make xconfig"
Select (m) module for CONFIG_COMPUTONE under character
devices. CONFIG_PCI and CONFIG_MODULES also may need to be set.
c) Set address on ISA cards then:
edit /usr/src/linux/drivers/char/ip2.c if needed
or
edit /etc/modprobe.conf if needed (module).
or both to match this setting.
d) Run "make modules"
e) Run "make modules_install"
f) Run "/sbin/depmod -a"
g) install driver using `modprobe ip2 <options>` (options listed below)
h) run ip2mkdev (either the script below or the binary version)
Kernel installation:
a) Determine free irq/address to use if any (configure BIOS if need be)
b) Run "make config" or "make menuconfig" or "make xconfig"
Select (y) kernel for CONFIG_COMPUTONE under character
devices. CONFIG_PCI may need to be set if you have PCI bus.
c) Set address on ISA cards then:
edit /usr/src/linux/drivers/char/ip2.c
(Optional - may be specified on kernel command line now)
d) Run "make zImage" or whatever target you prefer.
e) mv /usr/src/linux/arch/i386/boot/zImage to /boot.
f) Add new config for this kernel into /etc/lilo.conf, run "lilo"
or copy to a floppy disk and boot from that floppy disk.
g) Reboot using this kernel
h) run ip2mkdev (either the script below or the binary version)
Kernel command line options:
When compiling the driver into the kernel, io and irq may be
compiled into the driver by editing ip2.c and setting the values for
io and irq in the appropriate array. An alternative is to specify
a command line parameter to the kernel at boot up.
ip2=io0,irq0,io1,irq1,io2,irq2,io3,irq3
Note that this order is very different from the specifications for the
modload parameters which have separate IRQ and IO specifiers.
The io port also selects PCI (1) and EISA (2) boards.
io=0 No board
io=1 PCI board
io=2 EISA board
else ISA board io address
You only need to specify the boards which are present.
Examples:
2 PCI boards:
ip2=1,0,1,0
1 ISA board at 0x310 irq 5:
ip2=0x310,5
This can be added to and "append" option in lilo.conf similar to this:
append="ip2=1,0,1,0"
3. INSTALLATION
Previously, the driver sources were packaged with a set of patch files
to update the character drivers' makefile and configuration file, and other
kernel source files. A build script (ip2build) was included which applies
the patches if needed, and build any utilities needed.
What you receive may be a single patch file in conventional kernel
patch format build script. That form can also be applied by
running patch -p1 < ThePatchFile. Otherwise run ip2build.
The driver can be installed as a module (recommended) or built into the
kernel. This is selected as for other drivers through the `make config`
command from the root of the Linux source tree. If the driver is built
into the kernel you will need to edit the file ip2.c to match the boards
you are installing. See that file for instructions. If the driver is
installed as a module the configuration can also be specified on the
modprobe command line as follows:
modprobe ip2 irq=irq1,irq2,irq3,irq4 io=addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4
where irqnum is one of the valid Intelliport II interrupts (3,4,5,7,10,11,
12,15) and addr1-4 are the base addresses for up to four controllers. If
the irqs are not specified the driver uses the default in ip2.c (which
selects polled mode). If no base addresses are specified the defaults in
ip2.c are used. If you are autoloading the driver module with kerneld or
kmod the base addresses and interrupt number must also be set in ip2.c
and recompile or just insert and options line in /etc/modprobe.conf or both.
The options line is equivalent to the command line and takes precedence over
what is in ip2.c.
/etc/modprobe.conf sample:
options ip2 io=1,0x328 irq=1,10
alias char-major-71 ip2
alias char-major-72 ip2
alias char-major-73 ip2
The equivalent in ip2.c:
static int io[IP2_MAX_BOARDS]= { 1, 0x328, 0, 0 };
static int irq[IP2_MAX_BOARDS] = { 1, 10, -1, -1 };
The equivalent for the kernel command line (in lilo.conf):
append="ip2=1,1,0x328,10"
Note: Both io and irq should be updated to reflect YOUR system. An "io"
address of 1 or 2 indicates a PCI or EISA card in the board table.
The PCI or EISA irq will be assigned automatically.
Specifying an invalid or in-use irq will default the driver into
running in polled mode for that card. If all irq entries are 0 then
all cards will operate in polled mode.
If you select the driver as part of the kernel run :
make zlilo (or whatever you do to create a bootable kernel)
If you selected a module run :
make modules && make modules_install
The utility ip2mkdev (see 5 and 7 below) creates all the device nodes
required by the driver. For a device to be created it must be configured
in the driver and the board must be installed. Only devices corresponding
to real IntelliPort II ports are created. With multiple boards and expansion
boxes this will leave gaps in the sequence of device names. ip2mkdev uses
Linux tty naming conventions: ttyF0 - ttyF255 for normal devices, and
cuf0 - cuf255 for callout devices.
4. USING THE DRIVERS
As noted above, the driver implements the ports in accordance with Linux
conventions, and the devices should be interchangeable with the standard
serial devices. (This is a key point for problem reporting: please make
sure that what you are trying do works on the ttySx/cuax ports first; then
tell us what went wrong with the ip2 ports!)
Higher speeds can be obtained using the setserial utility which remaps
38,400 bps (extb) to 57,600 bps, 115,200 bps, or a custom speed.
Intelliport II installations using the PowerPort expansion module can
use the custom speed setting to select the highest speeds: 153,600 bps,
230,400 bps, 307,200 bps, 460,800bps and 921,600 bps. The base for
custom baud rate configuration is fixed at 921,600 for cards/expansion
modules with ST654's and 115200 for those with Cirrus CD1400's. This
corresponds to the maximum bit rates those chips are capable.
For example if the baud base is 921600 and the baud divisor is 18 then
the custom rate is 921600/18 = 51200 bps. See the setserial man page for
complete details. Of course if stty accepts the higher rates now you can
use that as well as the standard ioctls().
5. ip2mkdev and assorted utilities...
Several utilities, including the source for a binary ip2mkdev utility are
available under .../drivers/char/ip2. These can be build by changing to
that directory and typing "make" after the kernel has be built. If you do
not wish to compile the binary utilities, the shell script below can be
cut out and run as "ip2mkdev" to create the necessary device files. To
use the ip2mkdev script, you must have procfs enabled and the proc file
system mounted on /proc.
6. NOTES
This is a release version of the driver, but it is impossible to test it
in all configurations of Linux. If there is any anomalous behaviour that
does not match the standard serial port's behaviour please let us know.
7. ip2mkdev shell script
Previously, this script was simply attached here. It is now attached as a
shar archive to make it easier to extract the script from the documentation.
To create the ip2mkdev shell script change to a convenient directory (/tmp
works just fine) and run the following command:
unshar Documentation/computone.txt
(This file)
You should now have a file ip2mkdev in your current working directory with
permissions set to execute. Running that script with then create the
necessary devices for the Computone boards, interfaces, and ports which
are present on you system at the time it is run.
#!/bin/sh
# This is a shell archive (produced by GNU sharutils 4.2.1).
# To extract the files from this archive, save it to some FILE, remove
# everything before the `!/bin/sh' line above, then type `sh FILE'.
#
# Made on 2001-10-29 10:32 EST by <mhw@alcove.wittsend.com>.
# Source directory was `/home2/src/tmp'.
#
# Existing files will *not* be overwritten unless `-c' is specified.
#
# This shar contains:
# length mode name
# ------ ---------- ------------------------------------------
# 4251 -rwxr-xr-x ip2mkdev
#
save_IFS="${IFS}"
IFS="${IFS}:"
gettext_dir=FAILED
locale_dir=FAILED
first_param="$1"
for dir in $PATH
do
if test "$gettext_dir" = FAILED && test -f $dir/gettext \
&& ($dir/gettext --version >/dev/null 2>&1)
then
set `$dir/gettext --version 2>&1`
if test "$3" = GNU
then
gettext_dir=$dir
fi
fi
if test "$locale_dir" = FAILED && test -f $dir/shar \
&& ($dir/shar --print-text-domain-dir >/dev/null 2>&1)
then
locale_dir=`$dir/shar --print-text-domain-dir`
fi
done
IFS="$save_IFS"
if test "$locale_dir" = FAILED || test "$gettext_dir" = FAILED
then
echo=echo
else
TEXTDOMAINDIR=$locale_dir
export TEXTDOMAINDIR
TEXTDOMAIN=sharutils
export TEXTDOMAIN
echo="$gettext_dir/gettext -s"
fi
if touch -am -t 200112312359.59 $$.touch >/dev/null 2>&1 && test ! -f 200112312359.59 -a -f $$.touch; then
shar_touch='touch -am -t $1$2$3$4$5$6.$7 "$8"'
elif touch -am 123123592001.59 $$.touch >/dev/null 2>&1 && test ! -f 123123592001.59 -a ! -f 123123592001.5 -a -f $$.touch; then
shar_touch='touch -am $3$4$5$6$1$2.$7 "$8"'
elif touch -am 1231235901 $$.touch >/dev/null 2>&1 && test ! -f 1231235901 -a -f $$.touch; then
shar_touch='touch -am $3$4$5$6$2 "$8"'
else
shar_touch=:
echo
$echo 'WARNING: not restoring timestamps. Consider getting and'
$echo "installing GNU \`touch', distributed in GNU File Utilities..."
echo
fi
rm -f 200112312359.59 123123592001.59 123123592001.5 1231235901 $$.touch
#
if mkdir _sh17581; then
$echo 'x -' 'creating lock directory'
else
$echo 'failed to create lock directory'
exit 1
fi
# ============= ip2mkdev ==============
if test -f 'ip2mkdev' && test "$first_param" != -c; then
$echo 'x -' SKIPPING 'ip2mkdev' '(file already exists)'
else
$echo 'x -' extracting 'ip2mkdev' '(text)'
sed 's/^X//' << 'SHAR_EOF' > 'ip2mkdev' &&
#!/bin/sh -
#
# ip2mkdev
#
# Make or remove devices as needed for Computone Intelliport drivers
#
# First rule! If the dev file exists and you need it, don't mess
# with it. That prevents us from screwing up open ttys, ownership
# and permissions on a running system!
#
# This script will NOT remove devices that no longer exist if their
# board or interface box has been removed. If you want to get rid
# of them, you can manually do an "rm -f /dev/ttyF* /dev/cuaf*"
# before running this script. Running this script will then recreate
# all the valid devices.
#
# Michael H. Warfield
# /\/\|=mhw=|\/\/
# mhw@wittsend.com
#
# Updated 10/29/2000 for version 1.2.13 naming convention
# under devfs. /\/\|=mhw=|\/\/
#
# Updated 03/09/2000 for devfs support in ip2 drivers. /\/\|=mhw=|\/\/
#
X
if test -d /dev/ip2 ; then
# This is devfs mode... We don't do anything except create symlinks
# from the real devices to the old names!
X cd /dev
X echo "Creating symbolic links to devfs devices"
X for i in `ls ip2` ; do
X if test ! -L ip2$i ; then
X # Remove it incase it wasn't a symlink (old device)
X rm -f ip2$i
X ln -s ip2/$i ip2$i
X fi
X done
X for i in `( cd tts ; ls F* )` ; do
X if test ! -L tty$i ; then
X # Remove it incase it wasn't a symlink (old device)
X rm -f tty$i
X ln -s tts/$i tty$i
X fi
X done
X for i in `( cd cua ; ls F* )` ; do
X DEVNUMBER=`expr $i : 'F\(.*\)'`
X if test ! -L cuf$DEVNUMBER ; then
X # Remove it incase it wasn't a symlink (old device)
X rm -f cuf$DEVNUMBER
X ln -s cua/$i cuf$DEVNUMBER
X fi
X done
X exit 0
fi
X
if test ! -f /proc/tty/drivers
then
X echo "\
Unable to check driver status.
Make sure proc file system is mounted."
X
X exit 255
fi
X
if test ! -f /proc/tty/driver/ip2
then
X echo "\
Unable to locate ip2 proc file.
Attempting to load driver"
X
X if /sbin/insmod ip2
X then
X if test ! -f /proc/tty/driver/ip2
X then
X echo "\
Unable to locate ip2 proc file after loading driver.
Driver initialization failure or driver version error.
"
X exit 255
X fi
X else
X echo "Unable to load ip2 driver."
X exit 255
X fi
fi
X
# Ok... So we got the driver loaded and we can locate the procfs files.
# Next we need our major numbers.
X
TTYMAJOR=`sed -e '/^ip2/!d' -e '/\/dev\/tt/!d' -e 's/.*tt[^ ]*[ ]*\([0-9]*\)[ ]*.*/\1/' < /proc/tty/drivers`
CUAMAJOR=`sed -e '/^ip2/!d' -e '/\/dev\/cu/!d' -e 's/.*cu[^ ]*[ ]*\([0-9]*\)[ ]*.*/\1/' < /proc/tty/drivers`
BRDMAJOR=`sed -e '/^Driver: /!d' -e 's/.*IMajor=\([0-9]*\)[ ]*.*/\1/' < /proc/tty/driver/ip2`
X
echo "\
TTYMAJOR = $TTYMAJOR
CUAMAJOR = $CUAMAJOR
BRDMAJOR = $BRDMAJOR
"
X
# Ok... Now we should know our major numbers, if appropriate...
# Now we need our boards and start the device loops.
X
grep '^Board [0-9]:' /proc/tty/driver/ip2 | while read token number type alltherest
do
X # The test for blank "type" will catch the stats lead-in lines
X # if they exist in the file
X if test "$type" = "vacant" -o "$type" = "Vacant" -o "$type" = ""
X then
X continue
X fi
X
X BOARDNO=`expr "$number" : '\([0-9]\):'`
X PORTS=`expr "$alltherest" : '.*ports=\([0-9]*\)' | tr ',' ' '`
X MINORS=`expr "$alltherest" : '.*minors=\([0-9,]*\)' | tr ',' ' '`
X
X if test "$BOARDNO" = "" -o "$PORTS" = ""
X then
# This may be a bug. We should at least get this much information
X echo "Unable to process board line"
X continue
X fi
X
X if test "$MINORS" = ""
X then
# Silently skip this one. This board seems to have no boxes
X continue
X fi
X
X echo "board $BOARDNO: $type ports = $PORTS; port numbers = $MINORS"
X
X if test "$BRDMAJOR" != ""
X then
X BRDMINOR=`expr $BOARDNO \* 4`
X STSMINOR=`expr $BRDMINOR + 1`
X if test ! -c /dev/ip2ipl$BOARDNO ; then
X mknod /dev/ip2ipl$BOARDNO c $BRDMAJOR $BRDMINOR
X fi
X if test ! -c /dev/ip2stat$BOARDNO ; then
X mknod /dev/ip2stat$BOARDNO c $BRDMAJOR $STSMINOR
X fi
X fi
X
X if test "$TTYMAJOR" != ""
X then
X PORTNO=$BOARDBASE
X
X for PORTNO in $MINORS
X do
X if test ! -c /dev/ttyF$PORTNO ; then
X # We got the hardware but no device - make it
X mknod /dev/ttyF$PORTNO c $TTYMAJOR $PORTNO
X fi
X done
X fi
X
X if test "$CUAMAJOR" != ""
X then
X PORTNO=$BOARDBASE
X
X for PORTNO in $MINORS
X do
X if test ! -c /dev/cuf$PORTNO ; then
X # We got the hardware but no device - make it
X mknod /dev/cuf$PORTNO c $CUAMAJOR $PORTNO
X fi
X done
X fi
done
X
Xexit 0
SHAR_EOF
(set 20 01 10 29 10 32 01 'ip2mkdev'; eval "$shar_touch") &&
chmod 0755 'ip2mkdev' ||
$echo 'restore of' 'ip2mkdev' 'failed'
if ( md5sum --help 2>&1 | grep 'sage: md5sum \[' ) >/dev/null 2>&1 \
&& ( md5sum --version 2>&1 | grep -v 'textutils 1.12' ) >/dev/null; then
md5sum -c << SHAR_EOF >/dev/null 2>&1 \
|| $echo 'ip2mkdev:' 'MD5 check failed'
cb5717134509f38bad9fde6b1f79b4a4 ip2mkdev
SHAR_EOF
else
shar_count="`LC_ALL= LC_CTYPE= LANG= wc -c < 'ip2mkdev'`"
test 4251 -eq "$shar_count" ||
$echo 'ip2mkdev:' 'original size' '4251,' 'current size' "$shar_count!"
fi
fi
rm -fr _sh17581
exit 0

1
Documentation/connector/.gitignore vendored Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1 @@
ucon

32
Documentation/controllers/cpuacct.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
CPU Accounting Controller
-------------------------
The CPU accounting controller is used to group tasks using cgroups and
account the CPU usage of these groups of tasks.
The CPU accounting controller supports multi-hierarchy groups. An accounting
group accumulates the CPU usage of all of its child groups and the tasks
directly present in its group.
Accounting groups can be created by first mounting the cgroup filesystem.
# mkdir /cgroups
# mount -t cgroup -ocpuacct none /cgroups
With the above step, the initial or the parent accounting group
becomes visible at /cgroups. At bootup, this group includes all the
tasks in the system. /cgroups/tasks lists the tasks in this cgroup.
/cgroups/cpuacct.usage gives the CPU time (in nanoseconds) obtained by
this group which is essentially the CPU time obtained by all the tasks
in the system.
New accounting groups can be created under the parent group /cgroups.
# cd /cgroups
# mkdir g1
# echo $$ > g1
The above steps create a new group g1 and move the current shell
process (bash) into it. CPU time consumed by this bash and its children
can be obtained from g1/cpuacct.usage and the same is accumulated in
/cgroups/cpuacct.usage also.

24
Documentation/controllers/memory.txt
View File

@ -112,14 +112,22 @@ the per cgroup LRU.
2.2.1 Accounting details
All mapped pages (RSS) and unmapped user pages (Page Cache) are accounted.
RSS pages are accounted at the time of page_add_*_rmap() unless they've already
been accounted for earlier. A file page will be accounted for as Page Cache;
it's mapped into the page tables of a process, duplicate accounting is carefully
avoided. Page Cache pages are accounted at the time of add_to_page_cache().
The corresponding routines that remove a page from the page tables or removes
a page from Page Cache is used to decrement the accounting counters of the
cgroup.
All mapped anon pages (RSS) and cache pages (Page Cache) are accounted.
(some pages which never be reclaimable and will not be on global LRU
are not accounted. we just accounts pages under usual vm management.)
RSS pages are accounted at page_fault unless they've already been accounted
for earlier. A file page will be accounted for as Page Cache when it's
inserted into inode (radix-tree). While it's mapped into the page tables of
processes, duplicate accounting is carefully avoided.
A RSS page is unaccounted when it's fully unmapped. A PageCache page is
unaccounted when it's removed from radix-tree.
At page migration, accounting information is kept.
Note: we just account pages-on-lru because our purpose is to control amount
of used pages. not-on-lru pages are tend to be out-of-control from vm view.
2.3 Shared Page Accounting

16
Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt
View File

@ -23,6 +23,7 @@ Contents:
1.3 sparc64
1.4 ppc
1.5 SuperH
1.6 Blackfin
2. "Policy" / "Governor"?
2.1 Policy
@ -92,10 +93,19 @@ Several "PowerBook" and "iBook2" notebooks are supported.
1.5 SuperH
----------
The following SuperH processors are supported by cpufreq:
All SuperH processors supporting rate rounding through the clock
framework are supported by cpufreq.
SH-3
SH-4
1.6 Blackfin
------------
The following Blackfin processors are supported by cpufreq:
BF522, BF523, BF524, BF525, BF526, BF527, Rev 0.1 or higher
BF531, BF532, BF533, Rev 0.3 or higher
BF534, BF536, BF537, Rev 0.2 or higher
BF561, Rev 0.3 or higher
BF542, BF544, BF547, BF548, BF549, Rev 0.1 or higher
2. "Policy" / "Governor" ?

2
Documentation/cpusets.txt
View File

@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ hooks, beyond what is already present, required to manage dynamic
job placement on large systems.
Cpusets use the generic cgroup subsystem described in
Documentation/cgroup.txt.
Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt.
Requests by a task, using the sched_setaffinity(2) system call to
include CPUs in its CPU affinity mask, and using the mbind(2) and

582
Documentation/credentials.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,582 @@
====================
CREDENTIALS IN LINUX
====================
By: David Howells <dhowells@redhat.com>
Contents:
(*) Overview.
(*) Types of credentials.
(*) File markings.
(*) Task credentials.
- Immutable credentials.
- Accessing task credentials.
- Accessing another task's credentials.
- Altering credentials.
- Managing credentials.
(*) Open file credentials.
(*) Overriding the VFS's use of credentials.
========
OVERVIEW
========
There are several parts to the security check performed by Linux when one
object acts upon another:
(1) Objects.
Objects are things in the system that may be acted upon directly by
userspace programs. Linux has a variety of actionable objects, including:
- Tasks
- Files/inodes
- Sockets
- Message queues
- Shared memory segments
- Semaphores
- Keys
As a part of the description of all these objects there is a set of
credentials. What's in the set depends on the type of object.
(2) Object ownership.
Amongst the credentials of most objects, there will be a subset that
indicates the ownership of that object. This is used for resource
accounting and limitation (disk quotas and task rlimits for example).
In a standard UNIX filesystem, for instance, this will be defined by the
UID marked on the inode.
(3) The objective context.
Also amongst the credentials of those objects, there will be a subset that
indicates the 'objective context' of that object. This may or may not be
the same set as in (2) - in standard UNIX files, for instance, this is the
defined by the UID and the GID marked on the inode.
The objective context is used as part of the security calculation that is
carried out when an object is acted upon.
(4) Subjects.
A subject is an object that is acting upon another object.
Most of the objects in the system are inactive: they don't act on other
objects within the system. Processes/tasks are the obvious exception:
they do stuff; they access and manipulate things.
Objects other than tasks may under some circumstances also be subjects.
For instance an open file may send SIGIO to a task using the UID and EUID
given to it by a task that called fcntl(F_SETOWN) upon it. In this case,
the file struct will have a subjective context too.
(5) The subjective context.
A subject has an additional interpretation of its credentials. A subset
of its credentials forms the 'subjective context'. The subjective context
is used as part of the security calculation that is carried out when a
subject acts.
A Linux task, for example, has the FSUID, FSGID and the supplementary
group list for when it is acting upon a file - which are quite separate
from the real UID and GID that normally form the objective context of the
task.
(6) Actions.
Linux has a number of actions available that a subject may perform upon an
object. The set of actions available depends on the nature of the subject
and the object.
Actions include reading, writing, creating and deleting files; forking or
signalling and tracing tasks.
(7) Rules, access control lists and security calculations.
When a subject acts upon an object, a security calculation is made. This
involves taking the subjective context, the objective context and the
action, and searching one or more sets of rules to see whether the subject
is granted or denied permission to act in the desired manner on the
object, given those contexts.
There are two main sources of rules:
(a) Discretionary access control (DAC):
Sometimes the object will include sets of rules as part of its
description. This is an 'Access Control List' or 'ACL'. A Linux
file may supply more than one ACL.
A traditional UNIX file, for example, includes a permissions mask that
is an abbreviated ACL with three fixed classes of subject ('user',
'group' and 'other'), each of which may be granted certain privileges
('read', 'write' and 'execute' - whatever those map to for the object
in question). UNIX file permissions do not allow the arbitrary
specification of subjects, however, and so are of limited use.
A Linux file might also sport a POSIX ACL. This is a list of rules
that grants various permissions to arbitrary subjects.
(b) Mandatory access control (MAC):
The system as a whole may have one or more sets of rules that get
applied to all subjects and objects, regardless of their source.
SELinux and Smack are examples of this.
In the case of SELinux and Smack, each object is given a label as part
of its credentials. When an action is requested, they take the
subject label, the object label and the action and look for a rule
that says that this action is either granted or denied.
====================
TYPES OF CREDENTIALS
====================
The Linux kernel supports the following types of credentials:
(1) Traditional UNIX credentials.
Real User ID
Real Group ID
The UID and GID are carried by most, if not all, Linux objects, even if in
some cases it has to be invented (FAT or CIFS files for example, which are
derived from Windows). These (mostly) define the objective context of
that object, with tasks being slightly different in some cases.
Effective, Saved and FS User ID
Effective, Saved and FS Group ID
Supplementary groups
These are additional credentials used by tasks only. Usually, an
EUID/EGID/GROUPS will be used as the subjective context, and real UID/GID
will be used as the objective. For tasks, it should be noted that this is
not always true.
(2) Capabilities.
Set of permitted capabilities
Set of inheritable capabilities
Set of effective capabilities
Capability bounding set
These are only carried by tasks. They indicate superior capabilities
granted piecemeal to a task that an ordinary task wouldn't otherwise have.
These are manipulated implicitly by changes to the traditional UNIX
credentials, but can also be manipulated directly by the capset() system
call.
The permitted capabilities are those caps that the process might grant
itself to its effective or permitted sets through capset(). This
inheritable set might also be so constrained.
The effective capabilities are the ones that a task is actually allowed to
make use of itself.
The inheritable capabilities are the ones that may get passed across
execve().
The bounding set limits the capabilities that may be inherited across
execve(), especially when a binary is executed that will execute as UID 0.
(3) Secure management flags (securebits).
These are only carried by tasks. These govern the way the above
credentials are manipulated and inherited over certain operations such as
execve(). They aren't used directly as objective or subjective
credentials.
(4) Keys and keyrings.
These are only carried by tasks. They carry and cache security tokens
that don't fit into the other standard UNIX credentials. They are for
making such things as network filesystem keys available to the file
accesses performed by processes, without the necessity of ordinary
programs having to know about security details involved.
Keyrings are a special type of key. They carry sets of other keys and can
be searched for the desired key. Each process may subscribe to a number
of keyrings:
Per-thread keying
Per-process keyring
Per-session keyring
When a process accesses a key, if not already present, it will normally be
cached on one of these keyrings for future accesses to find.
For more information on using keys, see Documentation/keys.txt.
(5) LSM
The Linux Security Module allows extra controls to be placed over the
operations that a task may do. Currently Linux supports two main
alternate LSM options: SELinux and Smack.
Both work by labelling the objects in a system and then applying sets of
rules (policies) that say what operations a task with one label may do to
an object with another label.
(6) AF_KEY
This is a socket-based approach to credential management for networking
stacks [RFC 2367]. It isn't discussed by this document as it doesn't
interact directly with task and file credentials; rather it keeps system
level credentials.
When a file is opened, part of the opening task's subjective context is
recorded in the file struct created. This allows operations using that file
struct to use those credentials instead of the subjective context of the task
that issued the operation. An example of this would be a file opened on a
network filesystem where the credentials of the opened file should be presented
to the server, regardless of who is actually doing a read or a write upon it.
=============
FILE MARKINGS
=============
Files on disk or obtained over the network may have annotations that form the
objective security context of that file. Depending on the type of filesystem,
this may include one or more of the following:
(*) UNIX UID, GID, mode;
(*) Windows user ID;
(*) Access control list;
(*) LSM security label;
(*) UNIX exec privilege escalation bits (SUID/SGID);
(*) File capabilities exec privilege escalation bits.
These are compared to the task's subjective security context, and certain
operations allowed or disallowed as a result. In the case of execve(), the
privilege escalation bits come into play, and may allow the resulting process
extra privileges, based on the annotations on the executable file.
================
TASK CREDENTIALS
================
In Linux, all of a task's credentials are held in (uid, gid) or through
(groups, keys, LSM security) a refcounted structure of type 'struct cred'.
Each task points to its credentials by a pointer called 'cred' in its
task_struct.
Once a set of credentials has been prepared and committed, it may not be
changed, barring the following exceptions:
(1) its reference count may be changed;
(2) the reference count on the group_info struct it points to may be changed;
(3) the reference count on the security data it points to may be changed;
(4) the reference count on any keyrings it points to may be changed;
(5) any keyrings it points to may be revoked, expired or have their security
attributes changed; and
(6) the contents of any keyrings to which it points may be changed (the whole
point of keyrings being a shared set of credentials, modifiable by anyone
with appropriate access).
To alter anything in the cred struct, the copy-and-replace principle must be
adhered to. First take a copy, then alter the copy and then use RCU to change
the task pointer to make it point to the new copy. There are wrappers to aid
with this (see below).
A task may only alter its _own_ credentials; it is no longer permitted for a
task to alter another's credentials. This means the capset() system call is no
longer permitted to take any PID other than the one of the current process.
Also keyctl_instantiate() and keyctl_negate() functions no longer permit
attachment to process-specific keyrings in the requesting process as the
instantiating process may need to create them.
IMMUTABLE CREDENTIALS
---------------------
Once a set of credentials has been made public (by calling commit_creds() for
example), it must be considered immutable, barring two exceptions:
(1) The reference count may be altered.
(2) Whilst the keyring subscriptions of a set of credentials may not be
changed, the keyrings subscribed to may have their contents altered.
To catch accidental credential alteration at compile time, struct task_struct
has _const_ pointers to its credential sets, as does struct file. Furthermore,
certain functions such as get_cred() and put_cred() operate on const pointers,
thus rendering casts unnecessary, but require to temporarily ditch the const
qualification to be able to alter the reference count.
ACCESSING TASK CREDENTIALS
--------------------------
A task being able to alter only its own credentials permits the current process
to read or replace its own credentials without the need for any form of locking
- which simplifies things greatly. It can just call:
const struct cred *current_cred()
to get a pointer to its credentials structure, and it doesn't have to release
it afterwards.
There are convenience wrappers for retrieving specific aspects of a task's
credentials (the value is simply returned in each case):
uid_t current_uid(void) Current's real UID
gid_t current_gid(void) Current's real GID
uid_t current_euid(void) Current's effective UID
gid_t current_egid(void) Current's effective GID
uid_t current_fsuid(void) Current's file access UID
gid_t current_fsgid(void) Current's file access GID
kernel_cap_t current_cap(void) Current's effective capabilities
void *current_security(void) Current's LSM security pointer
struct user_struct *current_user(void) Current's user account
There are also convenience wrappers for retrieving specific associated pairs of
a task's credentials:
void current_uid_gid(uid_t *, gid_t *);
void current_euid_egid(uid_t *, gid_t *);
void current_fsuid_fsgid(uid_t *, gid_t *);
which return these pairs of values through their arguments after retrieving
them from the current task's credentials.
In addition, there is a function for obtaining a reference on the current
process's current set of credentials:
const struct cred *get_current_cred(void);
and functions for getting references to one of the credentials that don't
actually live in struct cred:
struct user_struct *get_current_user(void);
struct group_info *get_current_groups(void);
which get references to the current process's user accounting structure and
supplementary groups list respectively.
Once a reference has been obtained, it must be released with put_cred(),
free_uid() or put_group_info() as appropriate.
ACCESSING ANOTHER TASK'S CREDENTIALS
------------------------------------
Whilst a task may access its own credentials without the need for locking, the
same is not true of a task wanting to access another task's credentials. It
must use the RCU read lock and rcu_dereference().
The rcu_dereference() is wrapped by:
const struct cred *__task_cred(struct task_struct *task);
This should be used inside the RCU read lock, as in the following example:
void foo(struct task_struct *t, struct foo_data *f)
{
const struct cred *tcred;
...
rcu_read_lock();
tcred = __task_cred(t);
f->uid = tcred->uid;
f->gid = tcred->gid;
f->groups = get_group_info(tcred->groups);
rcu_read_unlock();
...
}
A function need not get RCU read lock to use __task_cred() if it is holding a
spinlock at the time as this implicitly holds the RCU read lock.
Should it be necessary to hold another task's credentials for a long period of
time, and possibly to sleep whilst doing so, then the caller should get a
reference on them using:
const struct cred *get_task_cred(struct task_struct *task);
This does all the RCU magic inside of it. The caller must call put_cred() on
the credentials so obtained when they're finished with.
There are a couple of convenience functions to access bits of another task's
credentials, hiding the RCU magic from the caller:
uid_t task_uid(task) Task's real UID
uid_t task_euid(task) Task's effective UID
If the caller is holding a spinlock or the RCU read lock at the time anyway,
then:
__task_cred(task)->uid
__task_cred(task)->euid
should be used instead. Similarly, if multiple aspects of a task's credentials
need to be accessed, RCU read lock or a spinlock should be used, __task_cred()
called, the result stored in a temporary pointer and then the credential
aspects called from that before dropping the lock. This prevents the
potentially expensive RCU magic from being invoked multiple times.
Should some other single aspect of another task's credentials need to be
accessed, then this can be used:
task_cred_xxx(task, member)
where 'member' is a non-pointer member of the cred struct. For instance:
uid_t task_cred_xxx(task, suid);
will retrieve 'struct cred::suid' from the task, doing the appropriate RCU
magic. This may not be used for pointer members as what they point to may
disappear the moment the RCU read lock is dropped.
ALTERING CREDENTIALS
--------------------
As previously mentioned, a task may only alter its own credentials, and may not
alter those of another task. This means that it doesn't need to use any
locking to alter its own credentials.
To alter the current process's credentials, a function should first prepare a
new set of credentials by calling:
struct cred *prepare_creds(void);
this locks current->cred_replace_mutex and then allocates and constructs a
duplicate of the current process's credentials, returning with the mutex still
held if successful. It returns NULL if not successful (out of memory).
The mutex prevents ptrace() from altering the ptrace state of a process whilst
security checks on credentials construction and changing is taking place as
the ptrace state may alter the outcome, particularly in the case of execve().
The new credentials set should be altered appropriately, and any security
checks and hooks done. Both the current and the proposed sets of credentials
are available for this purpose as current_cred() will return the current set
still at this point.
When the credential set is ready, it should be committed to the current process
by calling:
int commit_creds(struct cred *new);
This will alter various aspects of the credentials and the process, giving the
LSM a chance to do likewise, then it will use rcu_assign_pointer() to actually
commit the new credentials to current->cred, it will release
current->cred_replace_mutex to allow ptrace() to take place, and it will notify
the scheduler and others of the changes.
This function is guaranteed to return 0, so that it can be tail-called at the
end of such functions as sys_setresuid().
Note that this function consumes the caller's reference to the new credentials.
The caller should _not_ call put_cred() on the new credentials afterwards.
Furthermore, once this function has been called on a new set of credentials,
those credentials may _not_ be changed further.
Should the security checks fail or some other error occur after prepare_creds()
has been called, then the following function should be invoked:
void abort_creds(struct cred *new);
This releases the lock on current->cred_replace_mutex that prepare_creds() got
and then releases the new credentials.
A typical credentials alteration function would look something like this:
int alter_suid(uid_t suid)
{
struct cred *new;
int ret;
new = prepare_creds();
if (!new)
return -ENOMEM;
new->suid = suid;
ret = security_alter_suid(new);
if (ret < 0) {
abort_creds(new);
return ret;
}
return commit_creds(new);
}
MANAGING CREDENTIALS
--------------------
There are some functions to help manage credentials:
(*) void put_cred(const struct cred *cred);
This releases a reference to the given set of credentials. If the
reference count reaches zero, the credentials will be scheduled for
destruction by the RCU system.
(*) const struct cred *get_cred(const struct cred *cred);
This gets a reference on a live set of credentials, returning a pointer to
that set of credentials.
(*) struct cred *get_new_cred(struct cred *cred);
This gets a reference on a set of credentials that is under construction
and is thus still mutable, returning a pointer to that set of credentials.
=====================
OPEN FILE CREDENTIALS
=====================
When a new file is opened, a reference is obtained on the opening task's
credentials and this is attached to the file struct as 'f_cred' in place of
'f_uid' and 'f_gid'. Code that used to access file->f_uid and file->f_gid
should now access file->f_cred->fsuid and file->f_cred->fsgid.
It is safe to access f_cred without the use of RCU or locking because the
pointer will not change over the lifetime of the file struct, and nor will the
contents of the cred struct pointed to, barring the exceptions listed above
(see the Task Credentials section).
=======================================
OVERRIDING THE VFS'S USE OF CREDENTIALS
=======================================
Under some circumstances it is desirable to override the credentials used by
the VFS, and that can be done by calling into such as vfs_mkdir() with a
different set of credentials. This is done in the following places:
(*) sys_faccessat().
(*) do_coredump().
(*) nfs4recover.c.

2
Documentation/cris/README
View File

@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ operating system.
The ETRAX 100LX chip
--------------------
For reference, plase see the press-release:
For reference, please see the press-release:
http://www.axis.com/news/us/001101_etrax.htm

274
Documentation/development-process/1.Intro Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
1: A GUIDE TO THE KERNEL DEVELOPMENT PROCESS
The purpose of this document is to help developers (and their managers)
work with the development community with a minimum of frustration. It is
an attempt to document how this community works in a way which is
accessible to those who are not intimately familiar with Linux kernel
development (or, indeed, free software development in general). While
there is some technical material here, this is very much a process-oriented
discussion which does not require a deep knowledge of kernel programming to
understand.
1.1: EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The rest of this section covers the scope of the kernel development process
and the kinds of frustrations that developers and their employers can
encounter there. There are a great many reasons why kernel code should be
merged into the official ("mainline") kernel, including automatic
availability to users, community support in many forms, and the ability to
influence the direction of kernel development. Code contributed to the
Linux kernel must be made available under a GPL-compatible license.
Section 2 introduces the development process, the kernel release cycle, and
the mechanics of the merge window. The various phases in the patch
development, review, and merging cycle are covered. There is some
discussion of tools and mailing lists. Developers wanting to get started
with kernel development are encouraged to track down and fix bugs as an
initial exercise.
Section 3 covers early-stage project planning, with an emphasis on
involving the development community as soon as possible.
Section 4 is about the coding process; several pitfalls which have been
encountered by other developers are discussed. Some requirements for
patches are covered, and there is an introduction to some of the tools
which can help to ensure that kernel patches are correct.
Section 5 talks about the process of posting patches for review. To be
taken seriously by the development community, patches must be properly
formatted and described, and they must be sent to the right place.
Following the advice in this section should help to ensure the best
possible reception for your work.
Section 6 covers what happens after posting patches; the job is far from
done at that point. Working with reviewers is a crucial part of the
development process; this section offers a number of tips on how to avoid
problems at this important stage. Developers are cautioned against
assuming that the job is done when a patch is merged into the mainline.
Section 7 introduces a couple of "advanced" topics: managing patches with
git and reviewing patches posted by others.
Section 8 concludes the document with pointers to sources for more
information on kernel development.
1.2: WHAT THIS DOCUMENT IS ABOUT
The Linux kernel, at over 6 million lines of code and well over 1000 active
contributors, is one of the largest and most active free software projects
in existence. Since its humble beginning in 1991, this kernel has evolved
into a best-of-breed operating system component which runs on pocket-sized
digital music players, desktop PCs, the largest supercomputers in
existence, and all types of systems in between. It is a robust, efficient,
and scalable solution for almost any situation.
With the growth of Linux has come an increase in the number of developers
(and companies) wishing to participate in its development. Hardware
vendors want to ensure that Linux supports their products well, making
those products attractive to Linux users. Embedded systems vendors, who
use Linux as a component in an integrated product, want Linux to be as
capable and well-suited to the task at hand as possible. Distributors and
other software vendors who base their products on Linux have a clear
interest in the capabilities, performance, and reliability of the Linux
kernel. And end users, too, will often wish to change Linux to make it
better suit their needs.
One of the most compelling features of Linux is that it is accessible to
these developers; anybody with the requisite skills can improve Linux and
influence the direction of its development. Proprietary products cannot
offer this kind of openness, which is a characteristic of the free software
process. But, if anything, the kernel is even more open than most other
free software projects. A typical three-month kernel development cycle can
involve over 1000 developers working for more than 100 different companies
(or for no company at all).
Working with the kernel development community is not especially hard. But,
that notwithstanding, many potential contributors have experienced
difficulties when trying to do kernel work. The kernel community has
evolved its own distinct ways of operating which allow it to function
smoothly (and produce a high-quality product) in an environment where
thousands of lines of code are being changed every day. So it is not
surprising that Linux kernel development process differs greatly from
proprietary development methods.
The kernel's development process may come across as strange and
intimidating to new developers, but there are good reasons and solid
experience behind it. A developer who does not understand the kernel
community's ways (or, worse, who tries to flout or circumvent them) will
have a frustrating experience in store. The development community, while
being helpful to those who are trying to learn, has little time for those
who will not listen or who do not care about the development process.
It is hoped that those who read this document will be able to avoid that
frustrating experience. There is a lot of material here, but the effort
involved in reading it will be repaid in short order. The development
community is always in need of developers who will help to make the kernel
better; the following text should help you - or those who work for you -
join our community.
1.3: CREDITS
This document was written by Jonathan Corbet, corbet@lwn.net. It has been
improved by comments from Johannes Berg, James Berry, Alex Chiang, Roland
Dreier, Randy Dunlap, Jake Edge, Jiri Kosina, Matt Mackall, Arthur Marsh,
Amanda McPherson, Andrew Morton, Andrew Price, Tsugikazu Shibata, and
Jochen Voß.
This work was supported by the Linux Foundation; thanks especially to
Amanda McPherson, who saw the value of this effort and made it all happen.
1.4: THE IMPORTANCE OF GETTING CODE INTO THE MAINLINE
Some companies and developers occasionally wonder why they should bother
learning how to work with the kernel community and get their code into the
mainline kernel (the "mainline" being the kernel maintained by Linus
Torvalds and used as a base by Linux distributors). In the short term,
contributing code can look like an avoidable expense; it seems easier to
just keep the code separate and support users directly. The truth of the
matter is that keeping code separate ("out of tree") is a false economy.
As a way of illustrating the costs of out-of-tree code, here are a few
relevant aspects of the kernel development process; most of these will be
discussed in greater detail later in this document. Consider:
- Code which has been merged into the mainline kernel is available to all
Linux users. It will automatically be present on all distributions which
enable it. There is no need for driver disks, downloads, or the hassles
of supporting multiple versions of multiple distributions; it all just
works, for the developer and for the user. Incorporation into the
mainline solves a large number of distribution and support problems.
- While kernel developers strive to maintain a stable interface to user
space, the internal kernel API is in constant flux. The lack of a stable
internal interface is a deliberate design decision; it allows fundamental
improvements to be made at any time and results in higher-quality code.
But one result of that policy is that any out-of-tree code requires
constant upkeep if it is to work with new kernels. Maintaining
out-of-tree code requires significant amounts of work just to keep that
code working.
Code which is in the mainline, instead, does not require this work as the
result of a simple rule requiring any developer who makes an API change
to also fix any code that breaks as the result of that change. So code
which has been merged into the mainline has significantly lower
maintenance costs.
- Beyond that, code which is in the kernel will often be improved by other
developers. Surprising results can come from empowering your user
community and customers to improve your product.
- Kernel code is subjected to review, both before and after merging into
the mainline. No matter how strong the original developer's skills are,
this review process invariably finds ways in which the code can be
improved. Often review finds severe bugs and security problems. This is
especially true for code which has been developed in a closed
environment; such code benefits strongly from review by outside
developers. Out-of-tree code is lower-quality code.
- Participation in the development process is your way to influence the
direction of kernel development. Users who complain from the sidelines
are heard, but active developers have a stronger voice - and the ability
to implement changes which make the kernel work better for their needs.
- When code is maintained separately, the possibility that a third party
will contribute a different implementation of a similar feature always
exists. Should that happen, getting your code merged will become much
harder - to the point of impossibility. Then you will be faced with the
unpleasant alternatives of either (1) maintaining a nonstandard feature
out of tree indefinitely, or (2) abandoning your code and migrating your
users over to the in-tree version.
- Contribution of code is the fundamental action which makes the whole
process work. By contributing your code you can add new functionality to
the kernel and provide capabilities and examples which are of use to
other kernel developers. If you have developed code for Linux (or are
thinking about doing so), you clearly have an interest in the continued
success of this platform; contributing code is one of the best ways to
help ensure that success.
All of the reasoning above applies to any out-of-tree kernel code,
including code which is distributed in proprietary, binary-only form.
There are, however, additional factors which should be taken into account
before considering any sort of binary-only kernel code distribution. These
include:
- The legal issues around the distribution of proprietary kernel modules
are cloudy at best; quite a few kernel copyright holders believe that
most binary-only modules are derived products of the kernel and that, as
a result, their distribution is a violation of the GNU General Public
license (about which more will be said below). Your author is not a
lawyer, and nothing in this document can possibly be considered to be
legal advice. The true legal status of closed-source modules can only be
determined by the courts. But the uncertainty which haunts those modules
is there regardless.
- Binary modules greatly increase the difficulty of debugging kernel
problems, to the point that most kernel developers will not even try. So
the distribution of binary-only modules will make it harder for your
users to get support from the community.
- Support is also harder for distributors of binary-only modules, who must
provide a version of the module for every distribution and every kernel
version they wish to support. Dozens of builds of a single module can
be required to provide reasonably comprehensive coverage, and your users
will have to upgrade your module separately every time they upgrade their
kernel.
- Everything that was said above about code review applies doubly to
closed-source code. Since this code is not available at all, it cannot
have been reviewed by the community and will, beyond doubt, have serious
problems.
Makers of embedded systems, in particular, may be tempted to disregard much
of what has been said in this section in the belief that they are shipping
a self-contained product which uses a frozen kernel version and requires no
more development after its release. This argument misses the value of
widespread code review and the value of allowing your users to add
capabilities to your product. But these products, too, have a limited
commercial life, after which a new version must be released. At that
point, vendors whose code is in the mainline and well maintained will be
much better positioned to get the new product ready for market quickly.
1.5: LICENSING
Code is contributed to the Linux kernel under a number of licenses, but all
code must be compatible with version 2 of the GNU General Public License
(GPLv2), which is the license covering the kernel distribution as a whole.
In practice, that means that all code contributions are covered either by
GPLv2 (with, optionally, language allowing distribution under later
versions of the GPL) or the three-clause BSD license. Any contributions
which are not covered by a compatible license will not be accepted into the
kernel.
Copyright assignments are not required (or requested) for code contributed
to the kernel. All code merged into the mainline kernel retains its
original ownership; as a result, the kernel now has thousands of owners.
One implication of this ownership structure is that any attempt to change
the licensing of the kernel is doomed to almost certain failure. There are
few practical scenarios where the agreement of all copyright holders could
be obtained (or their code removed from the kernel). So, in particular,
there is no prospect of a migration to version 3 of the GPL in the
foreseeable future.
It is imperative that all code contributed to the kernel be legitimately
free software. For that reason, code from anonymous (or pseudonymous)
contributors will not be accepted. All contributors are required to "sign
off" on their code, stating that the code can be distributed with the
kernel under the GPL. Code which has not been licensed as free software by
its owner, or which risks creating copyright-related problems for the
kernel (such as code which derives from reverse-engineering efforts lacking
proper safeguards) cannot be contributed.
Questions about copyright-related issues are common on Linux development
mailing lists. Such questions will normally receive no shortage of
answers, but one should bear in mind that the people answering those
questions are not lawyers and cannot provide legal advice. If you have
legal questions relating to Linux source code, there is no substitute for
talking with a lawyer who understands this field. Relying on answers
obtained on technical mailing lists is a risky affair.

459
Documentation/development-process/2.Process Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,459 @@
2: HOW THE DEVELOPMENT PROCESS WORKS
Linux kernel development in the early 1990's was a pretty loose affair,
with relatively small numbers of users and developers involved. With a
user base in the millions and with some 2,000 developers involved over the
course of one year, the kernel has since had to evolve a number of
processes to keep development happening smoothly. A solid understanding of
how the process works is required in order to be an effective part of it.
2.1: THE BIG PICTURE
The kernel developers use a loosely time-based release process, with a new
major kernel release happening every two or three months. The recent
release history looks like this:
2.6.26 July 13, 2008
2.6.25 April 16, 2008
2.6.24 January 24, 2008
2.6.23 October 9, 2007
2.6.22 July 8, 2007
2.6.21 April 25, 2007
2.6.20 February 4, 2007
Every 2.6.x release is a major kernel release with new features, internal
API changes, and more. A typical 2.6 release can contain over 10,000
changesets with changes to several hundred thousand lines of code. 2.6 is
thus the leading edge of Linux kernel development; the kernel uses a
rolling development model which is continually integrating major changes.
A relatively straightforward discipline is followed with regard to the
merging of patches for each release. At the beginning of each development
cycle, the "merge window" is said to be open. At that time, code which is
deemed to be sufficiently stable (and which is accepted by the development
community) is merged into the mainline kernel. The bulk of changes for a
new development cycle (and all of the major changes) will be merged during
this time, at a rate approaching 1,000 changes ("patches," or "changesets")
per day.
(As an aside, it is worth noting that the changes integrated during the
merge window do not come out of thin air; they have been collected, tested,
and staged ahead of time. How that process works will be described in
detail later on).
The merge window lasts for two weeks. At the end of this time, Linus
Torvalds will declare that the window is closed and release the first of
the "rc" kernels. For the kernel which is destined to be 2.6.26, for
example, the release which happens at the end of the merge window will be
called 2.6.26-rc1. The -rc1 release is the signal that the time to merge
new features has passed, and that the time to stabilize the next kernel has
begun.
Over the next six to ten weeks, only patches which fix problems should be
submitted to the mainline. On occasion a more significant change will be
allowed, but such occasions are rare; developers who try to merge new
features outside of the merge window tend to get an unfriendly reception.
As a general rule, if you miss the merge window for a given feature, the
best thing to do is to wait for the next development cycle. (An occasional
exception is made for drivers for previously-unsupported hardware; if they
touch no in-tree code, they cannot cause regressions and should be safe to
add at any time).
As fixes make their way into the mainline, the patch rate will slow over
time. Linus releases new -rc kernels about once a week; a normal series
will get up to somewhere between -rc6 and -rc9 before the kernel is
considered to be sufficiently stable and the final 2.6.x release is made.
At that point the whole process starts over again.
As an example, here is how the 2.6.25 development cycle went (all dates in
2008):
January 24 2.6.24 stable release
February 10 2.6.25-rc1, merge window closes
February 15 2.6.25-rc2
February 24 2.6.25-rc3
March 4 2.6.25-rc4
March 9 2.6.25-rc5
March 16 2.6.25-rc6
March 25 2.6.25-rc7
April 1 2.6.25-rc8
April 11 2.6.25-rc9
April 16 2.6.25 stable release
How do the developers decide when to close the development cycle and create
the stable release? The most significant metric used is the list of
regressions from previous releases. No bugs are welcome, but those which
break systems which worked in the past are considered to be especially
serious. For this reason, patches which cause regressions are looked upon
unfavorably and are quite likely to be reverted during the stabilization
period.
The developers' goal is to fix all known regressions before the stable
release is made. In the real world, this kind of perfection is hard to
achieve; there are just too many variables in a project of this size.
There comes a point where delaying the final release just makes the problem
worse; the pile of changes waiting for the next merge window will grow
larger, creating even more regressions the next time around. So most 2.6.x
kernels go out with a handful of known regressions though, hopefully, none
of them are serious.
Once a stable release is made, its ongoing maintenance is passed off to the
"stable team," currently comprised of Greg Kroah-Hartman and Chris Wright.
The stable team will release occasional updates to the stable release using
the 2.6.x.y numbering scheme. To be considered for an update release, a
patch must (1) fix a significant bug, and (2) already be merged into the
mainline for the next development kernel. Continuing our 2.6.25 example,
the history (as of this writing) is:
May 1 2.6.25.1
May 6 2.6.25.2
May 9 2.6.25.3
May 15 2.6.25.4
June 7 2.6.25.5
June 9 2.6.25.6
June 16 2.6.25.7
June 21 2.6.25.8
June 24 2.6.25.9
Stable updates for a given kernel are made for approximately six months;
after that, the maintenance of stable releases is solely the responsibility
of the distributors which have shipped that particular kernel.
2.2: THE LIFECYCLE OF A PATCH
Patches do not go directly from the developer's keyboard into the mainline
kernel. There is, instead, a somewhat involved (if somewhat informal)
process designed to ensure that each patch is reviewed for quality and that
each patch implements a change which is desirable to have in the mainline.
This process can happen quickly for minor fixes, or, in the case of large
and controversial changes, go on for years. Much developer frustration
comes from a lack of understanding of this process or from attempts to
circumvent it.
In the hopes of reducing that frustration, this document will describe how
a patch gets into the kernel. What follows below is an introduction which
describes the process in a somewhat idealized way. A much more detailed
treatment will come in later sections.
The stages that a patch goes through are, generally:
- Design. This is where the real requirements for the patch - and the way
those requirements will be met - are laid out. Design work is often
done without involving the community, but it is better to do this work
in the open if at all possible; it can save a lot of time redesigning
things later.
- Early review. Patches are posted to the relevant mailing list, and
developers on that list reply with any comments they may have. This
process should turn up any major problems with a patch if all goes
well.
- Wider review. When the patch is getting close to ready for mainline
inclusion, it will be accepted by a relevant subsystem maintainer -
though this acceptance is not a guarantee that the patch will make it
all the way to the mainline. The patch will show up in the maintainer's
subsystem tree and into the staging trees (described below). When the
process works, this step leads to more extensive review of the patch and
the discovery of any problems resulting from the integration of this
patch with work being done by others.
- Merging into the mainline. Eventually, a successful patch will be
merged into the mainline repository managed by Linus Torvalds. More
comments and/or problems may surface at this time; it is important that
the developer be responsive to these and fix any issues which arise.
- Stable release. The number of users potentially affected by the patch
is now large, so, once again, new problems may arise.
- Long-term maintenance. While it is certainly possible for a developer
to forget about code after merging it, that sort of behavior tends to
leave a poor impression in the development community. Merging code
eliminates some of the maintenance burden, in that others will fix
problems caused by API changes. But the original developer should
continue to take responsibility for the code if it is to remain useful
in the longer term.
One of the largest mistakes made by kernel developers (or their employers)
is to try to cut the process down to a single "merging into the mainline"
step. This approach invariably leads to frustration for everybody
involved.
2.3: HOW PATCHES GET INTO THE KERNEL
There is exactly one person who can merge patches into the mainline kernel
repository: Linus Torvalds. But, of the over 12,000 patches which went
into the 2.6.25 kernel, only 250 (around 2%) were directly chosen by Linus
himself. The kernel project has long since grown to a size where no single
developer could possibly inspect and select every patch unassisted. The
way the kernel developers have addressed this growth is through the use of
a lieutenant system built around a chain of trust.
The kernel code base is logically broken down into a set of subsystems:
networking, specific architecture support, memory management, video
devices, etc. Most subsystems have a designated maintainer, a developer
who has overall responsibility for the code within that subsystem. These
subsystem maintainers are the gatekeepers (in a loose way) for the portion
of the kernel they manage; they are the ones who will (usually) accept a
patch for inclusion into the mainline kernel.
Subsystem maintainers each manage their own version of the kernel source
tree, usually (but certainly not always) using the git source management
tool. Tools like git (and related tools like quilt or mercurial) allow
maintainers to track a list of patches, including authorship information
and other metadata. At any given time, the maintainer can identify which
patches in his or her repository are not found in the mainline.
When the merge window opens, top-level maintainers will ask Linus to "pull"
the patches they have selected for merging from their repositories. If
Linus agrees, the stream of patches will flow up into his repository,
becoming part of the mainline kernel. The amount of attention that Linus
pays to specific patches received in a pull operation varies. It is clear
that, sometimes, he looks quite closely. But, as a general rule, Linus
trusts the subsystem maintainers to not send bad patches upstream.
Subsystem maintainers, in turn, can pull patches from other maintainers.
For example, the networking tree is built from patches which accumulated
first in trees dedicated to network device drivers, wireless networking,
etc. This chain of repositories can be arbitrarily long, though it rarely
exceeds two or three links. Since each maintainer in the chain trusts
those managing lower-level trees, this process is known as the "chain of
trust."
Clearly, in a system like this, getting patches into the kernel depends on
finding the right maintainer. Sending patches directly to Linus is not
normally the right way to go.
2.4: STAGING TREES
The chain of subsystem trees guides the flow of patches into the kernel,
but it also raises an interesting question: what if somebody wants to look
at all of the patches which are being prepared for the next merge window?
Developers will be interested in what other changes are pending to see
whether there are any conflicts to worry about; a patch which changes a
core kernel function prototype, for example, will conflict with any other
patches which use the older form of that function. Reviewers and testers
want access to the changes in their integrated form before all of those
changes land in the mainline kernel. One could pull changes from all of
the interesting subsystem trees, but that would be a big and error-prone
job.
The answer comes in the form of staging trees, where subsystem trees are
collected for testing and review. The older of these trees, maintained by
Andrew Morton, is called "-mm" (for memory management, which is how it got
started). The -mm tree integrates patches from a long list of subsystem
trees; it also has some patches aimed at helping with debugging.
Beyond that, -mm contains a significant collection of patches which have
been selected by Andrew directly. These patches may have been posted on a
mailing list, or they may apply to a part of the kernel for which there is
no designated subsystem tree. As a result, -mm operates as a sort of
subsystem tree of last resort; if there is no other obvious path for a
patch into the mainline, it is likely to end up in -mm. Miscellaneous
patches which accumulate in -mm will eventually either be forwarded on to
an appropriate subsystem tree or be sent directly to Linus. In a typical
development cycle, approximately 10% of the patches going into the mainline
get there via -mm.
The current -mm patch can always be found from the front page of
http://kernel.org/
Those who want to see the current state of -mm can get the "-mm of the
moment" tree, found at:
http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/mmotm/
Use of the MMOTM tree is likely to be a frustrating experience, though;
there is a definite chance that it will not even compile.
The other staging tree, started more recently, is linux-next, maintained by
Stephen Rothwell. The linux-next tree is, by design, a snapshot of what
the mainline is expected to look like after the next merge window closes.
Linux-next trees are announced on the linux-kernel and linux-next mailing
lists when they are assembled; they can be downloaded from:
http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/sfr/linux-next/
Some information about linux-next has been gathered at:
http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/
How the linux-next tree will fit into the development process is still
changing. As of this writing, the first full development cycle involving
linux-next (2.6.26) is coming to an end; thus far, it has proved to be a
valuable resource for finding and fixing integration problems before the
beginning of the merge window. See http://lwn.net/Articles/287155/ for
more information on how linux-next has worked to set up the 2.6.27 merge
window.
Some developers have begun to suggest that linux-next should be used as the
target for future development as well. The linux-next tree does tend to be
far ahead of the mainline and is more representative of the tree into which
any new work will be merged. The downside to this idea is that the
volatility of linux-next tends to make it a difficult development target.
See http://lwn.net/Articles/289013/ for more information on this topic, and
stay tuned; much is still in flux where linux-next is involved.
2.5: TOOLS
As can be seen from the above text, the kernel development process depends
heavily on the ability to herd collections of patches in various
directions. The whole thing would not work anywhere near as well as it
does without suitably powerful tools. Tutorials on how to use these tools
are well beyond the scope of this document, but there is space for a few
pointers.
By far the dominant source code management system used by the kernel
community is git. Git is one of a number of distributed version control
systems being developed in the free software community. It is well tuned
for kernel development, in that it performs quite well when dealing with
large repositories and large numbers of patches. It also has a reputation
for being difficult to learn and use, though it has gotten better over
time. Some sort of familiarity with git is almost a requirement for kernel
developers; even if they do not use it for their own work, they'll need git
to keep up with what other developers (and the mainline) are doing.
Git is now packaged by almost all Linux distributions. There is a home
page at
http://git.or.cz/
That page has pointers to documentation and tutorials. One should be
aware, in particular, of the Kernel Hacker's Guide to git, which has
information specific to kernel development:
http://linux.yyz.us/git-howto.html
Among the kernel developers who do not use git, the most popular choice is
almost certainly Mercurial:
http://www.selenic.com/mercurial/
Mercurial shares many features with git, but it provides an interface which
many find easier to use.
The other tool worth knowing about is Quilt:
http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt/
Quilt is a patch management system, rather than a source code management
system. It does not track history over time; it is, instead, oriented
toward tracking a specific set of changes against an evolving code base.
Some major subsystem maintainers use quilt to manage patches intended to go
upstream. For the management of certain kinds of trees (-mm, for example),
quilt is the best tool for the job.
2.6: MAILING LISTS
A great deal of Linux kernel development work is done by way of mailing
lists. It is hard to be a fully-functioning member of the community
without joining at least one list somewhere. But Linux mailing lists also
represent a potential hazard to developers, who risk getting buried under a
load of electronic mail, running afoul of the conventions used on the Linux
lists, or both.
Most kernel mailing lists are run on vger.kernel.org; the master list can
be found at:
http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html
There are lists hosted elsewhere, though; a number of them are at
lists.redhat.com.
The core mailing list for kernel development is, of course, linux-kernel.
This list is an intimidating place to be; volume can reach 500 messages per
day, the amount of noise is high, the conversation can be severely
technical, and participants are not always concerned with showing a high
degree of politeness. But there is no other place where the kernel
development community comes together as a whole; developers who avoid this
list will miss important information.
There are a few hints which can help with linux-kernel survival:
- Have the list delivered to a separate folder, rather than your main
mailbox. One must be able to ignore the stream for sustained periods of
time.
- Do not try to follow every conversation - nobody else does. It is
important to filter on both the topic of interest (though note that
long-running conversations can drift away from the original subject
without changing the email subject line) and the people who are
participating.
- Do not feed the trolls. If somebody is trying to stir up an angry
response, ignore them.
- When responding to linux-kernel email (or that on other lists) preserve
the Cc: header for all involved. In the absence of a strong reason (such
as an explicit request), you should never remove recipients. Always make
sure that the person you are responding to is in the Cc: list. This
convention also makes it unnecessary to explicitly ask to be copied on
replies to your postings.
- Search the list archives (and the net as a whole) before asking
questions. Some developers can get impatient with people who clearly
have not done their homework.
- Avoid top-posting (the practice of putting your answer above the quoted
text you are responding to). It makes your response harder to read and
makes a poor impression.
- Ask on the correct mailing list. Linux-kernel may be the general meeting
point, but it is not the best place to find developers from all
subsystems.
The last point - finding the correct mailing list - is a common place for
beginning developers to go wrong. Somebody who asks a networking-related
question on linux-kernel will almost certainly receive a polite suggestion
to ask on the netdev list instead, as that is the list frequented by most
networking developers. Other lists exist for the SCSI, video4linux, IDE,
filesystem, etc. subsystems. The best place to look for mailing lists is
in the MAINTAINERS file packaged with the kernel source.
2.7: GETTING STARTED WITH KERNEL DEVELOPMENT
Questions about how to get started with the kernel development process are
common - from both individuals and companies. Equally common are missteps
which make the beginning of the relationship harder than it has to be.
Companies often look to hire well-known developers to get a development
group started. This can, in fact, be an effective technique. But it also
tends to be expensive and does not do much to grow the pool of experienced
kernel developers. It is possible to bring in-house developers up to speed
on Linux kernel development, given the investment of a bit of time. Taking
this time can endow an employer with a group of developers who understand
the kernel and the company both, and who can help to train others as well.
Over the medium term, this is often the more profitable approach.
Individual developers are often, understandably, at a loss for a place to
start. Beginning with a large project can be intimidating; one often wants
to test the waters with something smaller first. This is the point where
some developers jump into the creation of patches fixing spelling errors or
minor coding style issues. Unfortunately, such patches create a level of
noise which is distracting for the development community as a whole, so,
increasingly, they are looked down upon. New developers wishing to
introduce themselves to the community will not get the sort of reception
they wish for by these means.
Andrew Morton gives this advice for aspiring kernel developers
The #1 project for all kernel beginners should surely be "make sure
that the kernel runs perfectly at all times on all machines which
you can lay your hands on". Usually the way to do this is to work
with others on getting things fixed up (this can require
persistence!) but that's fine - it's a part of kernel development.
(http://lwn.net/Articles/283982/).
In the absence of obvious problems to fix, developers are advised to look
at the current lists of regressions and open bugs in general. There is
never any shortage of issues in need of fixing; by addressing these issues,
developers will gain experience with the process while, at the same time,
building respect with the rest of the development community.

195
Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
3: EARLY-STAGE PLANNING
When contemplating a Linux kernel development project, it can be tempting
to jump right in and start coding. As with any significant project,
though, much of the groundwork for success is best laid before the first
line of code is written. Some time spent in early planning and
communication can save far more time later on.
3.1: SPECIFYING THE PROBLEM
Like any engineering project, a successful kernel enhancement starts with a
clear description of the problem to be solved. In some cases, this step is
easy: when a driver is needed for a specific piece of hardware, for
example. In others, though, it is tempting to confuse the real problem
with the proposed solution, and that can lead to difficulties.
Consider an example: some years ago, developers working with Linux audio
sought a way to run applications without dropouts or other artifacts caused
by excessive latency in the system. The solution they arrived at was a
kernel module intended to hook into the Linux Security Module (LSM)
framework; this module could be configured to give specific applications
access to the realtime scheduler. This module was implemented and sent to
the linux-kernel mailing list, where it immediately ran into problems.
To the audio developers, this security module was sufficient to solve their
immediate problem. To the wider kernel community, though, it was seen as a
misuse of the LSM framework (which is not intended to confer privileges
onto processes which they would not otherwise have) and a risk to system
stability. Their preferred solutions involved realtime scheduling access
via the rlimit mechanism for the short term, and ongoing latency reduction
work in the long term.
The audio community, however, could not see past the particular solution
they had implemented; they were unwilling to accept alternatives. The
resulting disagreement left those developers feeling disillusioned with the
entire kernel development process; one of them went back to an audio list
and posted this:
There are a number of very good Linux kernel developers, but they
tend to get outshouted by a large crowd of arrogant fools. Trying
to communicate user requirements to these people is a waste of
time. They are much too "intelligent" to listen to lesser mortals.
(http://lwn.net/Articles/131776/).
The reality of the situation was different; the kernel developers were far
more concerned about system stability, long-term maintenance, and finding
the right solution to the problem than they were with a specific module.
The moral of the story is to focus on the problem - not a specific solution
- and to discuss it with the development community before investing in the
creation of a body of code.
So, when contemplating a kernel development project, one should obtain
answers to a short set of questions:
- What, exactly, is the problem which needs to be solved?
- Who are the users affected by this problem? Which use cases should the
solution address?
- How does the kernel fall short in addressing that problem now?
Only then does it make sense to start considering possible solutions.
3.2: EARLY DISCUSSION
When planning a kernel development project, it makes great sense to hold
discussions with the community before launching into implementation. Early
communication can save time and trouble in a number of ways:
- It may well be that the problem is addressed by the kernel in ways which
you have not understood. The Linux kernel is large and has a number of
features and capabilities which are not immediately obvious. Not all
kernel capabilities are documented as well as one might like, and it is
easy to miss things. Your author has seen the posting of a complete
driver which duplicated an existing driver that the new author had been
unaware of. Code which reinvents existing wheels is not only wasteful;
it will also not be accepted into the mainline kernel.
- There may be elements of the proposed solution which will not be
acceptable for mainline merging. It is better to find out about
problems like this before writing the code.
- It's entirely possible that other developers have thought about the
problem; they may have ideas for a better solution, and may be willing
to help in the creation of that solution.
Years of experience with the kernel development community have taught a
clear lesson: kernel code which is designed and developed behind closed
doors invariably has problems which are only revealed when the code is
released into the community. Sometimes these problems are severe,
requiring months or years of effort before the code can be brought up to
the kernel community's standards. Some examples include:
- The Devicescape network stack was designed and implemented for
single-processor systems. It could not be merged into the mainline
until it was made suitable for multiprocessor systems. Retrofitting
locking and such into code is a difficult task; as a result, the merging
of this code (now called mac80211) was delayed for over a year.
- The Reiser4 filesystem included a number of capabilities which, in the
core kernel developers' opinion, should have been implemented in the
virtual filesystem layer instead. It also included features which could
not easily be implemented without exposing the system to user-caused
deadlocks. The late revelation of these problems - and refusal to
address some of them - has caused Reiser4 to stay out of the mainline
kernel.
- The AppArmor security module made use of internal virtual filesystem
data structures in ways which were considered to be unsafe and
unreliable. This code has since been significantly reworked, but
remains outside of the mainline.
In each of these cases, a great deal of pain and extra work could have been
avoided with some early discussion with the kernel developers.
3.3: WHO DO YOU TALK TO?
When developers decide to take their plans public, the next question will
be: where do we start? The answer is to find the right mailing list(s) and
the right maintainer. For mailing lists, the best approach is to look in
the MAINTAINERS file for a relevant place to post. If there is a suitable
subsystem list, posting there is often preferable to posting on
linux-kernel; you are more likely to reach developers with expertise in the
relevant subsystem and the environment may be more supportive.
Finding maintainers can be a bit harder. Again, the MAINTAINERS file is
the place to start. That file tends to not always be up to date, though,
and not all subsystems are represented there. The person listed in the
MAINTAINERS file may, in fact, not be the person who is actually acting in
that role currently. So, when there is doubt about who to contact, a
useful trick is to use git (and "git log" in particular) to see who is
currently active within the subsystem of interest. Look at who is writing
patches, and who, if anybody, is attaching Signed-off-by lines to those
patches. Those are the people who will be best placed to help with a new
development project.
If all else fails, talking to Andrew Morton can be an effective way to
track down a maintainer for a specific piece of code.
3.4: WHEN TO POST?
If possible, posting your plans during the early stages can only be
helpful. Describe the problem being solved and any plans that have been
made on how the implementation will be done. Any information you can
provide can help the development community provide useful input on the
project.
One discouraging thing which can happen at this stage is not a hostile
reaction, but, instead, little or no reaction at all. The sad truth of the
matter is (1) kernel developers tend to be busy, (2) there is no shortage
of people with grand plans and little code (or even prospect of code) to
back them up, and (3) nobody is obligated to review or comment on ideas
posted by others. If a request-for-comments posting yields little in the
way of comments, do not assume that it means there is no interest in the
project. Unfortunately, you also cannot assume that there are no problems
with your idea. The best thing to do in this situation is to proceed,
keeping the community informed as you go.
3.5: GETTING OFFICIAL BUY-IN
If your work is being done in a corporate environment - as most Linux
kernel work is - you must, obviously, have permission from suitably
empowered managers before you can post your company's plans or code to a
public mailing list. The posting of code which has not been cleared for
release under a GPL-compatible license can be especially problematic; the
sooner that a company's management and legal staff can agree on the posting
of a kernel development project, the better off everybody involved will be.
Some readers may be thinking at this point that their kernel work is
intended to support a product which does not yet have an officially
acknowledged existence. Revealing their employer's plans on a public
mailing list may not be a viable option. In cases like this, it is worth
considering whether the secrecy is really necessary; there is often no real
need to keep development plans behind closed doors.
That said, there are also cases where a company legitimately cannot
disclose its plans early in the development process. Companies with
experienced kernel developers may choose to proceed in an open-loop manner
on the assumption that they will be able to avoid serious integration
problems later. For companies without that sort of in-house expertise, the
best option is often to hire an outside developer to review the plans under
a non-disclosure agreement. The Linux Foundation operates an NDA program
designed to help with this sort of situation; more information can be found
at:
http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/NDA_program
This kind of review is often enough to avoid serious problems later on
without requiring public disclosure of the project.

384
Documentation/development-process/4.Coding Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,384 @@
4: GETTING THE CODE RIGHT
While there is much to be said for a solid and community-oriented design
process, the proof of any kernel development project is in the resulting
code. It is the code which will be examined by other developers and merged
(or not) into the mainline tree. So it is the quality of this code which
will determine the ultimate success of the project.
This section will examine the coding process. We'll start with a look at a
number of ways in which kernel developers can go wrong. Then the focus
will shift toward doing things right and the tools which can help in that
quest.
4.1: PITFALLS
* Coding style
The kernel has long had a standard coding style, described in
Documentation/CodingStyle. For much of that time, the policies described
in that file were taken as being, at most, advisory. As a result, there is
a substantial amount of code in the kernel which does not meet the coding
style guidelines. The presence of that code leads to two independent
hazards for kernel developers.
The first of these is to believe that the kernel coding standards do not
matter and are not enforced. The truth of the matter is that adding new
code to the kernel is very difficult if that code is not coded according to
the standard; many developers will request that the code be reformatted
before they will even review it. A code base as large as the kernel
requires some uniformity of code to make it possible for developers to
quickly understand any part of it. So there is no longer room for
strangely-formatted code.
Occasionally, the kernel's coding style will run into conflict with an
employer's mandated style. In such cases, the kernel's style will have to
win before the code can be merged. Putting code into the kernel means
giving up a degree of control in a number of ways - including control over
how the code is formatted.
The other trap is to assume that code which is already in the kernel is
urgently in need of coding style fixes. Developers may start to generate
reformatting patches as a way of gaining familiarity with the process, or
as a way of getting their name into the kernel changelogs - or both. But
pure coding style fixes are seen as noise by the development community;
they tend to get a chilly reception. So this type of patch is best
avoided. It is natural to fix the style of a piece of code while working
on it for other reasons, but coding style changes should not be made for
their own sake.
The coding style document also should not be read as an absolute law which
can never be transgressed. If there is a good reason to go against the
style (a line which becomes far less readable if split to fit within the
80-column limit, for example), just do it.
* Abstraction layers
Computer Science professors teach students to make extensive use of
abstraction layers in the name of flexibility and information hiding.
Certainly the kernel makes extensive use of abstraction; no project
involving several million lines of code could do otherwise and survive.
But experience has shown that excessive or premature abstraction can be
just as harmful as premature optimization. Abstraction should be used to
the level required and no further.
At a simple level, consider a function which has an argument which is
always passed as zero by all callers. One could retain that argument just
in case somebody eventually needs to use the extra flexibility that it
provides. By that time, though, chances are good that the code which
implements this extra argument has been broken in some subtle way which was
never noticed - because it has never been used. Or, when the need for
extra flexibility arises, it does not do so in a way which matches the
programmer's early expectation. Kernel developers will routinely submit
patches to remove unused arguments; they should, in general, not be added
in the first place.
Abstraction layers which hide access to hardware - often to allow the bulk
of a driver to be used with multiple operating systems - are especially
frowned upon. Such layers obscure the code and may impose a performance
penalty; they do not belong in the Linux kernel.
On the other hand, if you find yourself copying significant amounts of code
from another kernel subsystem, it is time to ask whether it would, in fact,
make sense to pull out some of that code into a separate library or to
implement that functionality at a higher level. There is no value in
replicating the same code throughout the kernel.
* #ifdef and preprocessor use in general
The C preprocessor seems to present a powerful temptation to some C
programmers, who see it as a way to efficiently encode a great deal of
flexibility into a source file. But the preprocessor is not C, and heavy
use of it results in code which is much harder for others to read and
harder for the compiler to check for correctness. Heavy preprocessor use
is almost always a sign of code which needs some cleanup work.
Conditional compilation with #ifdef is, indeed, a powerful feature, and it
is used within the kernel. But there is little desire to see code which is
sprinkled liberally with #ifdef blocks. As a general rule, #ifdef use
should be confined to header files whenever possible.
Conditionally-compiled code can be confined to functions which, if the code
is not to be present, simply become empty. The compiler will then quietly
optimize out the call to the empty function. The result is far cleaner
code which is easier to follow.
C preprocessor macros present a number of hazards, including possible
multiple evaluation of expressions with side effects and no type safety.
If you are tempted to define a macro, consider creating an inline function
instead. The code which results will be the same, but inline functions are
easier to read, do not evaluate their arguments multiple times, and allow
the compiler to perform type checking on the arguments and return value.
* Inline functions
Inline functions present a hazard of their own, though. Programmers can
become enamored of the perceived efficiency inherent in avoiding a function
call and fill a source file with inline functions. Those functions,
however, can actually reduce performance. Since their code is replicated
at each call site, they end up bloating the size of the compiled kernel.
That, in turn, creates pressure on the processor's memory caches, which can
slow execution dramatically. Inline functions, as a rule, should be quite
small and relatively rare. The cost of a function call, after all, is not
that high; the creation of large numbers of inline functions is a classic
example of premature optimization.
In general, kernel programmers ignore cache effects at their peril. The
classic time/space tradeoff taught in beginning data structures classes
often does not apply to contemporary hardware. Space *is* time, in that a
larger program will run slower than one which is more compact.
* Locking
In May, 2006, the "Devicescape" networking stack was, with great
fanfare, released under the GPL and made available for inclusion in the
mainline kernel. This donation was welcome news; support for wireless
networking in Linux was considered substandard at best, and the Devicescape
stack offered the promise of fixing that situation. Yet, this code did not
actually make it into the mainline until June, 2007 (2.6.22). What
happened?
This code showed a number of signs of having been developed behind
corporate doors. But one large problem in particular was that it was not
designed to work on multiprocessor systems. Before this networking stack
(now called mac80211) could be merged, a locking scheme needed to be
retrofitted onto it.
Once upon a time, Linux kernel code could be developed without thinking
about the concurrency issues presented by multiprocessor systems. Now,
however, this document is being written on a dual-core laptop. Even on
single-processor systems, work being done to improve responsiveness will
raise the level of concurrency within the kernel. The days when kernel
code could be written without thinking about locking are long past.
Any resource (data structures, hardware registers, etc.) which could be
accessed concurrently by more than one thread must be protected by a lock.
New code should be written with this requirement in mind; retrofitting
locking after the fact is a rather more difficult task. Kernel developers
should take the time to understand the available locking primitives well
enough to pick the right tool for the job. Code which shows a lack of
attention to concurrency will have a difficult path into the mainline.
* Regressions
One final hazard worth mentioning is this: it can be tempting to make a
change (which may bring big improvements) which causes something to break
for existing users. This kind of change is called a "regression," and
regressions have become most unwelcome in the mainline kernel. With few
exceptions, changes which cause regressions will be backed out if the
regression cannot be fixed in a timely manner. Far better to avoid the
regression in the first place.
It is often argued that a regression can be justified if it causes things
to work for more people than it creates problems for. Why not make a
change if it brings new functionality to ten systems for each one it
breaks? The best answer to this question was expressed by Linus in July,
2007:
So we don't fix bugs by introducing new problems. That way lies
madness, and nobody ever knows if you actually make any real
progress at all. Is it two steps forwards, one step back, or one
step forward and two steps back?
(http://lwn.net/Articles/243460/).
An especially unwelcome type of regression is any sort of change to the
user-space ABI. Once an interface has been exported to user space, it must
be supported indefinitely. This fact makes the creation of user-space
interfaces particularly challenging: since they cannot be changed in
incompatible ways, they must be done right the first time. For this
reason, a great deal of thought, clear documentation, and wide review for
user-space interfaces is always required.
4.2: CODE CHECKING TOOLS
For now, at least, the writing of error-free code remains an ideal that few
of us can reach. What we can hope to do, though, is to catch and fix as
many of those errors as possible before our code goes into the mainline
kernel. To that end, the kernel developers have put together an impressive
array of tools which can catch a wide variety of obscure problems in an
automated way. Any problem caught by the computer is a problem which will
not afflict a user later on, so it stands to reason that the automated
tools should be used whenever possible.
The first step is simply to heed the warnings produced by the compiler.
Contemporary versions of gcc can detect (and warn about) a large number of
potential errors. Quite often, these warnings point to real problems.
Code submitted for review should, as a rule, not produce any compiler
warnings. When silencing warnings, take care to understand the real cause
and try to avoid "fixes" which make the warning go away without addressing
its cause.
Note that not all compiler warnings are enabled by default. Build the
kernel with "make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W" to get the full set.
The kernel provides several configuration options which turn on debugging
features; most of these are found in the "kernel hacking" submenu. Several
of these options should be turned on for any kernel used for development or
testing purposes. In particular, you should turn on:
- ENABLE_WARN_DEPRECATED, ENABLE_MUST_CHECK, and FRAME_WARN to get an
extra set of warnings for problems like the use of deprecated interfaces
or ignoring an important return value from a function. The output
generated by these warnings can be verbose, but one need not worry about
warnings from other parts of the kernel.
- DEBUG_OBJECTS will add code to track the lifetime of various objects
created by the kernel and warn when things are done out of order. If
you are adding a subsystem which creates (and exports) complex objects
of its own, consider adding support for the object debugging
infrastructure.
- DEBUG_SLAB can find a variety of memory allocation and use errors; it
should be used on most development kernels.
- DEBUG_SPINLOCK, DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEP, and DEBUG_MUTEXES will find a
number of common locking errors.
There are quite a few other debugging options, some of which will be
discussed below. Some of them have a significant performance impact and
should not be used all of the time. But some time spent learning the
available options will likely be paid back many times over in short order.
One of the heavier debugging tools is the locking checker, or "lockdep."
This tool will track the acquisition and release of every lock (spinlock or
mutex) in the system, the order in which locks are acquired relative to
each other, the current interrupt environment, and more. It can then
ensure that locks are always acquired in the same order, that the same
interrupt assumptions apply in all situations, and so on. In other words,
lockdep can find a number of scenarios in which the system could, on rare
occasion, deadlock. This kind of problem can be painful (for both
developers and users) in a deployed system; lockdep allows them to be found
in an automated manner ahead of time. Code with any sort of non-trivial
locking should be run with lockdep enabled before being submitted for
inclusion.
As a diligent kernel programmer, you will, beyond doubt, check the return
status of any operation (such as a memory allocation) which can fail. The
fact of the matter, though, is that the resulting failure recovery paths
are, probably, completely untested. Untested code tends to be broken code;
you could be much more confident of your code if all those error-handling
paths had been exercised a few times.
The kernel provides a fault injection framework which can do exactly that,
especially where memory allocations are involved. With fault injection
enabled, a configurable percentage of memory allocations will be made to
fail; these failures can be restricted to a specific range of code.
Running with fault injection enabled allows the programmer to see how the
code responds when things go badly. See
Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.text for more information on
how to use this facility.
Other kinds of errors can be found with the "sparse" static analysis tool.
With sparse, the programmer can be warned about confusion between
user-space and kernel-space addresses, mixture of big-endian and
small-endian quantities, the passing of integer values where a set of bit
flags is expected, and so on. Sparse must be installed separately (it can
be found at http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/devel/sparse/ if your
distributor does not package it); it can then be run on the code by adding
"C=1" to your make command.
Other kinds of portability errors are best found by compiling your code for
other architectures. If you do not happen to have an S/390 system or a
Blackfin development board handy, you can still perform the compilation
step. A large set of cross compilers for x86 systems can be found at
http://www.kernel.org/pub/tools/crosstool/
Some time spent installing and using these compilers will help avoid
embarrassment later.
4.3: DOCUMENTATION
Documentation has often been more the exception than the rule with kernel
development. Even so, adequate documentation will help to ease the merging
of new code into the kernel, make life easier for other developers, and
will be helpful for your users. In many cases, the addition of
documentation has become essentially mandatory.
The first piece of documentation for any patch is its associated
changelog. Log entries should describe the problem being solved, the form
of the solution, the people who worked on the patch, any relevant
effects on performance, and anything else that might be needed to
understand the patch.
Any code which adds a new user-space interface - including new sysfs or
/proc files - should include documentation of that interface which enables
user-space developers to know what they are working with. See
Documentation/ABI/README for a description of how this documentation should
be formatted and what information needs to be provided.
The file Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt describes all of the kernel's
boot-time parameters. Any patch which adds new parameters should add the
appropriate entries to this file.
Any new configuration options must be accompanied by help text which
clearly explains the options and when the user might want to select them.
Internal API information for many subsystems is documented by way of
specially-formatted comments; these comments can be extracted and formatted
in a number of ways by the "kernel-doc" script. If you are working within
a subsystem which has kerneldoc comments, you should maintain them and add
them, as appropriate, for externally-available functions. Even in areas
which have not been so documented, there is no harm in adding kerneldoc
comments for the future; indeed, this can be a useful activity for
beginning kernel developers. The format of these comments, along with some
information on how to create kerneldoc templates can be found in the file
Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt.
Anybody who reads through a significant amount of existing kernel code will
note that, often, comments are most notable by their absence. Once again,
the expectations for new code are higher than they were in the past;
merging uncommented code will be harder. That said, there is little desire
for verbosely-commented code. The code should, itself, be readable, with
comments explaining the more subtle aspects.
Certain things should always be commented. Uses of memory barriers should
be accompanied by a line explaining why the barrier is necessary. The
locking rules for data structures generally need to be explained somewhere.
Major data structures need comprehensive documentation in general.
Non-obvious dependencies between separate bits of code should be pointed
out. Anything which might tempt a code janitor to make an incorrect
"cleanup" needs a comment saying why it is done the way it is. And so on.
4.4: INTERNAL API CHANGES
The binary interface provided by the kernel to user space cannot be broken
except under the most severe circumstances. The kernel's internal
programming interfaces, instead, are highly fluid and can be changed when
the need arises. If you find yourself having to work around a kernel API,
or simply not using a specific functionality because it does not meet your
needs, that may be a sign that the API needs to change. As a kernel
developer, you are empowered to make such changes.
There are, of course, some catches. API changes can be made, but they need
to be well justified. So any patch making an internal API change should be
accompanied by a description of what the change is and why it is
necessary. This kind of change should also be broken out into a separate
patch, rather than buried within a larger patch.
The other catch is that a developer who changes an internal API is
generally charged with the task of fixing any code within the kernel tree
which is broken by the change. For a widely-used function, this duty can
lead to literally hundreds or thousands of changes - many of which are
likely to conflict with work being done by other developers. Needless to
say, this can be a large job, so it is best to be sure that the
justification is solid.
When making an incompatible API change, one should, whenever possible,
ensure that code which has not been updated is caught by the compiler.
This will help you to be sure that you have found all in-tree uses of that
interface. It will also alert developers of out-of-tree code that there is
a change that they need to respond to. Supporting out-of-tree code is not
something that kernel developers need to be worried about, but we also do
not have to make life harder for out-of-tree developers than it it needs to
be.

278
Documentation/development-process/5.Posting Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,278 @@
5: POSTING PATCHES
Sooner or later, the time comes when your work is ready to be presented to
the community for review and, eventually, inclusion into the mainline
kernel. Unsurprisingly, the kernel development community has evolved a set
of conventions and procedures which are used in the posting of patches;
following them will make life much easier for everybody involved. This
document will attempt to cover these expectations in reasonable detail;
more information can also be found in the files SubmittingPatches,
SubmittingDrivers, and SubmitChecklist in the kernel documentation
directory.
5.1: WHEN TO POST
There is a constant temptation to avoid posting patches before they are
completely "ready." For simple patches, that is not a problem. If the
work being done is complex, though, there is a lot to be gained by getting
feedback from the community before the work is complete. So you should
consider posting in-progress work, or even making a git tree available so
that interested developers can catch up with your work at any time.
When posting code which is not yet considered ready for inclusion, it is a
good idea to say so in the posting itself. Also mention any major work
which remains to be done and any known problems. Fewer people will look at
patches which are known to be half-baked, but those who do will come in
with the idea that they can help you drive the work in the right direction.
5.2: BEFORE CREATING PATCHES
There are a number of things which should be done before you consider
sending patches to the development community. These include:
- Test the code to the extent that you can. Make use of the kernel's
debugging tools, ensure that the kernel will build with all reasonable
combinations of configuration options, use cross-compilers to build for
different architectures, etc.
- Make sure your code is compliant with the kernel coding style
guidelines.
- Does your change have performance implications? If so, you should run
benchmarks showing what the impact (or benefit) of your change is; a
summary of the results should be included with the patch.
- Be sure that you have the right to post the code. If this work was done
for an employer, the employer likely has a right to the work and must be
agreeable with its release under the GPL.
As a general rule, putting in some extra thought before posting code almost
always pays back the effort in short order.
5.3: PATCH PREPARATION
The preparation of patches for posting can be a surprising amount of work,
but, once again, attempting to save time here is not generally advisable
even in the short term.
Patches must be prepared against a specific version of the kernel. As a
general rule, a patch should be based on the current mainline as found in
Linus's git tree. It may become necessary to make versions against -mm,
linux-next, or a subsystem tree, though, to facilitate wider testing and
review. Depending on the area of your patch and what is going on
elsewhere, basing a patch against these other trees can require a
significant amount of work resolving conflicts and dealing with API
changes.
Only the most simple changes should be formatted as a single patch;
everything else should be made as a logical series of changes. Splitting
up patches is a bit of an art; some developers spend a long time figuring
out how to do it in the way that the community expects. There are a few
rules of thumb, however, which can help considerably:
- The patch series you post will almost certainly not be the series of
changes found in your working revision control system. Instead, the
changes you have made need to be considered in their final form, then
split apart in ways which make sense. The developers are interested in
discrete, self-contained changes, not the path you took to get to those
changes.
- Each logically independent change should be formatted as a separate
patch. These changes can be small ("add a field to this structure") or
large (adding a significant new driver, for example), but they should be
conceptually small and amenable to a one-line description. Each patch
should make a specific change which can be reviewed on its own and
verified to do what it says it does.
- As a way of restating the guideline above: do not mix different types of
changes in the same patch. If a single patch fixes a critical security
bug, rearranges a few structures, and reformats the code, there is a
good chance that it will be passed over and the important fix will be
lost.
- Each patch should yield a kernel which builds and runs properly; if your
patch series is interrupted in the middle, the result should still be a
working kernel. Partial application of a patch series is a common
scenario when the "git bisect" tool is used to find regressions; if the
result is a broken kernel, you will make life harder for developers and
users who are engaging in the noble work of tracking down problems.
- Do not overdo it, though. One developer recently posted a set of edits
to a single file as 500 separate patches - an act which did not make him
the most popular person on the kernel mailing list. A single patch can
be reasonably large as long as it still contains a single *logical*
change.
- It can be tempting to add a whole new infrastructure with a series of
patches, but to leave that infrastructure unused until the final patch
in the series enables the whole thing. This temptation should be
avoided if possible; if that series adds regressions, bisection will
finger the last patch as the one which caused the problem, even though
the real bug is elsewhere. Whenever possible, a patch which adds new
code should make that code active immediately.
Working to create the perfect patch series can be a frustrating process
which takes quite a bit of time and thought after the "real work" has been
done. When done properly, though, it is time well spent.
5.4: PATCH FORMATTING
So now you have a perfect series of patches for posting, but the work is
not done quite yet. Each patch needs to be formatted into a message which
quickly and clearly communicates its purpose to the rest of the world. To
that end, each patch will be composed of the following:
- An optional "From" line naming the author of the patch. This line is
only necessary if you are passing on somebody else's patch via email,
but it never hurts to add it when in doubt.
- A one-line description of what the patch does. This message should be
enough for a reader who sees it with no other context to figure out the
scope of the patch; it is the line that will show up in the "short form"
changelogs. This message is usually formatted with the relevant
subsystem name first, followed by the purpose of the patch. For
example:
gpio: fix build on CONFIG_GPIO_SYSFS=n
- A blank line followed by a detailed description of the contents of the
patch. This description can be as long as is required; it should say
what the patch does and why it should be applied to the kernel.
- One or more tag lines, with, at a minimum, one Signed-off-by: line from
the author of the patch. Tags will be described in more detail below.
The above three items should, normally, be the text used when committing
the change to a revision control system. They are followed by:
- The patch itself, in the unified ("-u") patch format. Using the "-p"
option to diff will associate function names with changes, making the
resulting patch easier for others to read.
You should avoid including changes to irrelevant files (those generated by
the build process, for example, or editor backup files) in the patch. The
file "dontdiff" in the Documentation directory can help in this regard;
pass it to diff with the "-X" option.
The tags mentioned above are used to describe how various developers have
been associated with the development of this patch. They are described in
detail in the SubmittingPatches document; what follows here is a brief
summary. Each of these lines has the format:
tag: Full Name <email address> optional-other-stuff
The tags in common use are:
- Signed-off-by: this is a developer's certification that he or she has
the right to submit the patch for inclusion into the kernel. It is an
agreement to the Developer's Certificate of Origin, the full text of
which can be found in Documentation/SubmittingPatches. Code without a
proper signoff cannot be merged into the mainline.
- Acked-by: indicates an agreement by another developer (often a
maintainer of the relevant code) that the patch is appropriate for
inclusion into the kernel.
- Tested-by: states that the named person has tested the patch and found
it to work.
- Reviewed-by: the named developer has reviewed the patch for correctness;
see the reviewer's statement in Documentation/SubmittingPatches for more
detail.
- Reported-by: names a user who reported a problem which is fixed by this
patch; this tag is used to give credit to the (often underappreciated)
people who test our code and let us know when things do not work
correctly.
- Cc: the named person received a copy of the patch and had the
opportunity to comment on it.
Be careful in the addition of tags to your patches: only Cc: is appropriate
for addition without the explicit permission of the person named.
5.5: SENDING THE PATCH
Before you mail your patches, there are a couple of other things you should
take care of:
- Are you sure that your mailer will not corrupt the patches? Patches
which have had gratuitous white-space changes or line wrapping performed
by the mail client will not apply at the other end, and often will not
be examined in any detail. If there is any doubt at all, mail the patch
to yourself and convince yourself that it shows up intact.
Documentation/email-clients.txt has some helpful hints on making
specific mail clients work for sending patches.
- Are you sure your patch is free of silly mistakes? You should always
run patches through scripts/checkpatch.pl and address the complaints it
comes up with. Please bear in mind that checkpatch.pl, while being the
embodiment of a fair amount of thought about what kernel patches should
look like, is not smarter than you. If fixing a checkpatch.pl complaint
would make the code worse, don't do it.
Patches should always be sent as plain text. Please do not send them as
attachments; that makes it much harder for reviewers to quote sections of
the patch in their replies. Instead, just put the patch directly into your
message.
When mailing patches, it is important to send copies to anybody who might
be interested in it. Unlike some other projects, the kernel encourages
people to err on the side of sending too many copies; don't assume that the
relevant people will see your posting on the mailing lists. In particular,
copies should go to:
- The maintainer(s) of the affected subsystem(s). As described earlier,
the MAINTAINERS file is the first place to look for these people.
- Other developers who have been working in the same area - especially
those who might be working there now. Using git to see who else has
modified the files you are working on can be helpful.
- If you are responding to a bug report or a feature request, copy the
original poster as well.
- Send a copy to the relevant mailing list, or, if nothing else applies,
the linux-kernel list.
- If you are fixing a bug, think about whether the fix should go into the
next stable update. If so, stable@kernel.org should get a copy of the
patch. Also add a "Cc: stable@kernel.org" to the tags within the patch
itself; that will cause the stable team to get a notification when your
fix goes into the mainline.
When selecting recipients for a patch, it is good to have an idea of who
you think will eventually accept the patch and get it merged. While it
is possible to send patches directly to Linus Torvalds and have him merge
them, things are not normally done that way. Linus is busy, and there are
subsystem maintainers who watch over specific parts of the kernel. Usually
you will be wanting that maintainer to merge your patches. If there is no
obvious maintainer, Andrew Morton is often the patch target of last resort.
Patches need good subject lines. The canonical format for a patch line is
something like:
[PATCH nn/mm] subsys: one-line description of the patch
where "nn" is the ordinal number of the patch, "mm" is the total number of
patches in the series, and "subsys" is the name of the affected subsystem.
Clearly, nn/mm can be omitted for a single, standalone patch.
If you have a significant series of patches, it is customary to send an
introductory description as part zero. This convention is not universally
followed though; if you use it, remember that information in the
introduction does not make it into the kernel changelogs. So please ensure
that the patches, themselves, have complete changelog information.
In general, the second and following parts of a multi-part patch should be
sent as a reply to the first part so that they all thread together at the
receiving end. Tools like git and quilt have commands to mail out a set of
patches with the proper threading. If you have a long series, though, and
are using git, please provide the --no-chain-reply-to option to avoid
creating exceptionally deep nesting.

202
Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
6: FOLLOWTHROUGH
At this point, you have followed the guidelines given so far and, with the
addition of your own engineering skills, have posted a perfect series of
patches. One of the biggest mistakes that even experienced kernel
developers can make is to conclude that their work is now done. In truth,
posting patches indicates a transition into the next stage of the process,
with, possibly, quite a bit of work yet to be done.
It is a rare patch which is so good at its first posting that there is no
room for improvement. The kernel development process recognizes this fact,
and, as a result, is heavily oriented toward the improvement of posted
code. You, as the author of that code, will be expected to work with the
kernel community to ensure that your code is up to the kernel's quality
standards. A failure to participate in this process is quite likely to
prevent the inclusion of your patches into the mainline.
6.1: WORKING WITH REVIEWERS
A patch of any significance will result in a number of comments from other
developers as they review the code. Working with reviewers can be, for
many developers, the most intimidating part of the kernel development
process. Life can be made much easier, though, if you keep a few things in
mind:
- If you have explained your patch well, reviewers will understand its
value and why you went to the trouble of writing it. But that value
will not keep them from asking a fundamental question: what will it be
like to maintain a kernel with this code in it five or ten years later?
Many of the changes you may be asked to make - from coding style tweaks
to substantial rewrites - come from the understanding that Linux will
still be around and under development a decade from now.
- Code review is hard work, and it is a relatively thankless occupation;
people remember who wrote kernel code, but there is little lasting fame
for those who reviewed it. So reviewers can get grumpy, especially when
they see the same mistakes being made over and over again. If you get a
review which seems angry, insulting, or outright offensive, resist the
impulse to respond in kind. Code review is about the code, not about
the people, and code reviewers are not attacking you personally.
- Similarly, code reviewers are not trying to promote their employers'
agendas at the expense of your own. Kernel developers often expect to
be working on the kernel years from now, but they understand that their
employer could change. They truly are, almost without exception,
working toward the creation of the best kernel they can; they are not
trying to create discomfort for their employers' competitors.
What all of this comes down to is that, when reviewers send you comments,
you need to pay attention to the technical observations that they are
making. Do not let their form of expression or your own pride keep that
from happening. When you get review comments on a patch, take the time to
understand what the reviewer is trying to say. If possible, fix the things
that the reviewer is asking you to fix. And respond back to the reviewer:
thank them, and describe how you will answer their questions.
Note that you do not have to agree with every change suggested by
reviewers. If you believe that the reviewer has misunderstood your code,
explain what is really going on. If you have a technical objection to a
suggested change, describe it and justify your solution to the problem. If
your explanations make sense, the reviewer will accept them. Should your
explanation not prove persuasive, though, especially if others start to
agree with the reviewer, take some time to think things over again. It can
be easy to become blinded by your own solution to a problem to the point
that you don't realize that something is fundamentally wrong or, perhaps,
you're not even solving the right problem.
One fatal mistake is to ignore review comments in the hope that they will
go away. They will not go away. If you repost code without having
responded to the comments you got the time before, you're likely to find
that your patches go nowhere.
Speaking of reposting code: please bear in mind that reviewers are not
going to remember all the details of the code you posted the last time
around. So it is always a good idea to remind reviewers of previously
raised issues and how you dealt with them; the patch changelog is a good
place for this kind of information. Reviewers should not have to search
through list archives to familiarize themselves with what was said last
time; if you help them get a running start, they will be in a better mood
when they revisit your code.
What if you've tried to do everything right and things still aren't going
anywhere? Most technical disagreements can be resolved through discussion,
but there are times when somebody simply has to make a decision. If you
honestly believe that this decision is going against you wrongly, you can
always try appealing to a higher power. As of this writing, that higher
power tends to be Andrew Morton. Andrew has a great deal of respect in the
kernel development community; he can often unjam a situation which seems to
be hopelessly blocked. Appealing to Andrew should not be done lightly,
though, and not before all other alternatives have been explored. And bear
in mind, of course, that he may not agree with you either.
6.2: WHAT HAPPENS NEXT
If a patch is considered to be a good thing to add to the kernel, and once
most of the review issues have been resolved, the next step is usually
entry into a subsystem maintainer's tree. How that works varies from one
subsystem to the next; each maintainer has his or her own way of doing
things. In particular, there may be more than one tree - one, perhaps,
dedicated to patches planned for the next merge window, and another for
longer-term work.
For patches applying to areas for which there is no obvious subsystem tree
(memory management patches, for example), the default tree often ends up
being -mm. Patches which affect multiple subsystems can also end up going
through the -mm tree.
Inclusion into a subsystem tree can bring a higher level of visibility to a
patch. Now other developers working with that tree will get the patch by
default. Subsystem trees typically feed into -mm and linux-next as well,
making their contents visible to the development community as a whole. At
this point, there's a good chance that you will get more comments from a
new set of reviewers; these comments need to be answered as in the previous
round.
What may also happen at this point, depending on the nature of your patch,
is that conflicts with work being done by others turn up. In the worst
case, heavy patch conflicts can result in some work being put on the back
burner so that the remaining patches can be worked into shape and merged.
Other times, conflict resolution will involve working with the other
developers and, possibly, moving some patches between trees to ensure that
everything applies cleanly. This work can be a pain, but count your
blessings: before the advent of the linux-next tree, these conflicts often
only turned up during the merge window and had to be addressed in a hurry.
Now they can be resolved at leisure, before the merge window opens.
Some day, if all goes well, you'll log on and see that your patch has been
merged into the mainline kernel. Congratulations! Once the celebration is
complete (and you have added yourself to the MAINTAINERS file), though, it
is worth remembering an important little fact: the job still is not done.
Merging into the mainline brings its own challenges.
To begin with, the visibility of your patch has increased yet again. There
may be a new round of comments from developers who had not been aware of
the patch before. It may be tempting to ignore them, since there is no
longer any question of your code being merged. Resist that temptation,
though; you still need to be responsive to developers who have questions or
suggestions.
More importantly, though: inclusion into the mainline puts your code into
the hands of a much larger group of testers. Even if you have contributed
a driver for hardware which is not yet available, you will be surprised by
how many people will build your code into their kernels. And, of course,
where there are testers, there will be bug reports.
The worst sort of bug reports are regressions. If your patch causes a
regression, you'll find an uncomfortable number of eyes upon you;
regressions need to be fixed as soon as possible. If you are unwilling or
unable to fix the regression (and nobody else does it for you), your patch
will almost certainly be removed during the stabilization period. Beyond
negating all of the work you have done to get your patch into the mainline,
having a patch pulled as the result of a failure to fix a regression could
well make it harder for you to get work merged in the future.
After any regressions have been dealt with, there may be other, ordinary
bugs to deal with. The stabilization period is your best opportunity to
fix these bugs and ensure that your code's debut in a mainline kernel
release is as solid as possible. So, please, answer bug reports, and fix
the problems if at all possible. That's what the stabilization period is
for; you can start creating cool new patches once any problems with the old
ones have been taken care of.
And don't forget that there are other milestones which may also create bug
reports: the next mainline stable release, when prominent distributors pick
up a version of the kernel containing your patch, etc. Continuing to
respond to these reports is a matter of basic pride in your work. If that
is insufficient motivation, though, it's also worth considering that the
development community remembers developers who lose interest in their code
after it's merged. The next time you post a patch, they will be evaluating
it with the assumption that you will not be around to maintain it
afterward.
6.3: OTHER THINGS THAT CAN HAPPEN
One day, you may open your mail client and see that somebody has mailed you
a patch to your code. That is one of the advantages of having your code
out there in the open, after all. If you agree with the patch, you can
either forward it on to the subsystem maintainer (be sure to include a
proper From: line so that the attribution is correct, and add a signoff of
your own), or send an Acked-by: response back and let the original poster
send it upward.
If you disagree with the patch, send a polite response explaining why. If
possible, tell the author what changes need to be made to make the patch
acceptable to you. There is a certain resistance to merging patches which
are opposed by the author and maintainer of the code, but it only goes so
far. If you are seen as needlessly blocking good work, those patches will
eventually flow around you and get into the mainline anyway. In the Linux
kernel, nobody has absolute veto power over any code. Except maybe Linus.
On very rare occasion, you may see something completely different: another
developer posts a different solution to your problem. At that point,
chances are that one of the two patches will not be merged, and "mine was
here first" is not considered to be a compelling technical argument. If
somebody else's patch displaces yours and gets into the mainline, there is
really only one way to respond: be pleased that your problem got solved and
get on with your work. Having one's work shoved aside in this manner can
be hurtful and discouraging, but the community will remember your reaction
long after they have forgotten whose patch actually got merged.

173
Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
7: ADVANCED TOPICS
At this point, hopefully, you have a handle on how the development process
works. There is still more to learn, however! This section will cover a
number of topics which can be helpful for developers wanting to become a
regular part of the Linux kernel development process.
7.1: MANAGING PATCHES WITH GIT
The use of distributed version control for the kernel began in early 2002,
when Linus first started playing with the proprietary BitKeeper
application. While BitKeeper was controversial, the approach to software
version management it embodied most certainly was not. Distributed version
control enabled an immediate acceleration of the kernel development
project. In current times, there are several free alternatives to
BitKeeper. For better or for worse, the kernel project has settled on git
as its tool of choice.
Managing patches with git can make life much easier for the developer,
especially as the volume of those patches grows. Git also has its rough
edges and poses certain hazards; it is a young and powerful tool which is
still being civilized by its developers. This document will not attempt to
teach the reader how to use git; that would be sufficient material for a
long document in its own right. Instead, the focus here will be on how git
fits into the kernel development process in particular. Developers who
wish to come up to speed with git will find more information at:
http://git.or.cz/
http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/user-manual.html
and on various tutorials found on the web.
The first order of business is to read the above sites and get a solid
understanding of how git works before trying to use it to make patches
available to others. A git-using developer should be able to obtain a copy
of the mainline repository, explore the revision history, commit changes to
the tree, use branches, etc. An understanding of git's tools for the
rewriting of history (such as rebase) is also useful. Git comes with its
own terminology and concepts; a new user of git should know about refs,
remote branches, the index, fast-forward merges, pushes and pulls, detached
heads, etc. It can all be a little intimidating at the outset, but the
concepts are not that hard to grasp with a bit of study.
Using git to generate patches for submission by email can be a good
exercise while coming up to speed.
When you are ready to start putting up git trees for others to look at, you
will, of course, need a server that can be pulled from. Setting up such a
server with git-daemon is relatively straightforward if you have a system
which is accessible to the Internet. Otherwise, free, public hosting sites
(Github, for example) are starting to appear on the net. Established
developers can get an account on kernel.org, but those are not easy to come
by; see http://kernel.org/faq/ for more information.
The normal git workflow involves the use of a lot of branches. Each line
of development can be separated into a separate "topic branch" and
maintained independently. Branches in git are cheap, there is no reason to
not make free use of them. And, in any case, you should not do your
development in any branch which you intend to ask others to pull from.
Publicly-available branches should be created with care; merge in patches
from development branches when they are in complete form and ready to go -
not before.
Git provides some powerful tools which can allow you to rewrite your
development history. An inconvenient patch (one which breaks bisection,
say, or which has some other sort of obvious bug) can be fixed in place or
made to disappear from the history entirely. A patch series can be
rewritten as if it had been written on top of today's mainline, even though
you have been working on it for months. Changes can be transparently
shifted from one branch to another. And so on. Judicious use of git's
ability to revise history can help in the creation of clean patch sets with
fewer problems.
Excessive use of this capability can lead to other problems, though, beyond
a simple obsession for the creation of the perfect project history.
Rewriting history will rewrite the changes contained in that history,
turning a tested (hopefully) kernel tree into an untested one. But, beyond
that, developers cannot easily collaborate if they do not have a shared
view of the project history; if you rewrite history which other developers
have pulled into their repositories, you will make life much more difficult
for those developers. So a simple rule of thumb applies here: history
which has been exported to others should generally be seen as immutable
thereafter.
So, once you push a set of changes to your publicly-available server, those
changes should not be rewritten. Git will attempt to enforce this rule if
you try to push changes which do not result in a fast-forward merge
(i.e. changes which do not share the same history). It is possible to
override this check, and there may be times when it is necessary to rewrite
an exported tree. Moving changesets between trees to avoid conflicts in
linux-next is one example. But such actions should be rare. This is one
of the reasons why development should be done in private branches (which
can be rewritten if necessary) and only moved into public branches when
it's in a reasonably advanced state.
As the mainline (or other tree upon which a set of changes is based)
advances, it is tempting to merge with that tree to stay on the leading
edge. For a private branch, rebasing can be an easy way to keep up with
another tree, but rebasing is not an option once a tree is exported to the
world. Once that happens, a full merge must be done. Merging occasionally
makes good sense, but overly frequent merges can clutter the history
needlessly. Suggested technique in this case is to merge infrequently, and
generally only at specific release points (such as a mainline -rc
release). If you are nervous about specific changes, you can always
perform test merges in a private branch. The git "rerere" tool can be
useful in such situations; it remembers how merge conflicts were resolved
so that you don't have to do the same work twice.
One of the biggest recurring complaints about tools like git is this: the
mass movement of patches from one repository to another makes it easy to
slip in ill-advised changes which go into the mainline below the review
radar. Kernel developers tend to get unhappy when they see that kind of
thing happening; putting up a git tree with unreviewed or off-topic patches
can affect your ability to get trees pulled in the future. Quoting Linus:
You can send me patches, but for me to pull a git patch from you, I
need to know that you know what you're doing, and I need to be able
to trust things *without* then having to go and check every
individual change by hand.
(http://lwn.net/Articles/224135/).
To avoid this kind of situation, ensure that all patches within a given
branch stick closely to the associated topic; a "driver fixes" branch
should not be making changes to the core memory management code. And, most
importantly, do not use a git tree to bypass the review process. Post an
occasional summary of the tree to the relevant list, and, when the time is
right, request that the tree be included in linux-next.
If and when others start to send patches for inclusion into your tree,
don't forget to review them. Also ensure that you maintain the correct
authorship information; the git "am" tool does its best in this regard, but
you may have to add a "From:" line to the patch if it has been relayed to
you via a third party.
When requesting a pull, be sure to give all the relevant information: where
your tree is, what branch to pull, and what changes will result from the
pull. The git request-pull command can be helpful in this regard; it will
format the request as other developers expect, and will also check to be
sure that you have remembered to push those changes to the public server.
7.2: REVIEWING PATCHES
Some readers will certainly object to putting this section with "advanced
topics" on the grounds that even beginning kernel developers should be
reviewing patches. It is certainly true that there is no better way to
learn how to program in the kernel environment than by looking at code
posted by others. In addition, reviewers are forever in short supply; by
looking at code you can make a significant contribution to the process as a
whole.
Reviewing code can be an intimidating prospect, especially for a new kernel
developer who may well feel nervous about questioning code - in public -
which has been posted by those with more experience. Even code written by
the most experienced developers can be improved, though. Perhaps the best
piece of advice for reviewers (all reviewers) is this: phrase review
comments as questions rather than criticisms. Asking "how does the lock
get released in this path?" will always work better than stating "the
locking here is wrong."
Different developers will review code from different points of view. Some
are mostly concerned with coding style and whether code lines have trailing
white space. Others will focus primarily on whether the change implemented
by the patch as a whole is a good thing for the kernel or not. Yet others
will check for problematic locking, excessive stack usage, possible
security issues, duplication of code found elsewhere, adequate
documentation, adverse effects on performance, user-space ABI changes, etc.
All types of review, if they lead to better code going into the kernel, are
welcome and worthwhile.

74
Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
8: FOR MORE INFORMATION
There are numerous sources of information on Linux kernel development and
related topics. First among those will always be the Documentation
directory found in the kernel source distribution. The top-level HOWTO
file is an important starting point; SubmittingPatches and
SubmittingDrivers are also something which all kernel developers should
read. Many internal kernel APIs are documented using the kerneldoc
mechanism; "make htmldocs" or "make pdfdocs" can be used to generate those
documents in HTML or PDF format (though the version of TeX shipped by some
distributions runs into internal limits and fails to process the documents
properly).
Various web sites discuss kernel development at all levels of detail. Your
author would like to humbly suggest http://lwn.net/ as a source;
information on many specific kernel topics can be found via the LWN kernel
index at:
http://lwn.net/Kernel/Index/
Beyond that, a valuable resource for kernel developers is:
http://kernelnewbies.org/
Information about the linux-next tree gathers at:
http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/
And, of course, one should not forget http://kernel.org/, the definitive
location for kernel release information.
There are a number of books on kernel development:
Linux Device Drivers, 3rd Edition (Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro
Rubini, and Greg Kroah-Hartman). Online at
http://lwn.net/Kernel/LDD3/.
Linux Kernel Development (Robert Love).
Understanding the Linux Kernel (Daniel Bovet and Marco Cesati).
All of these books suffer from a common fault, though: they tend to be
somewhat obsolete by the time they hit the shelves, and they have been on
the shelves for a while now. Still, there is quite a bit of good
information to be found there.
Documentation for git can be found at:
http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/
http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/user-manual.html
9: CONCLUSION
Congratulations to anybody who has made it through this long-winded
document. Hopefully it has provided a helpful understanding of how the
Linux kernel is developed and how you can participate in that process.
In the end, it's the participation that matters. Any open source software
project is no more than the sum of what its contributors put into it. The
Linux kernel has progressed as quickly and as well as it has because it has
been helped by an impressively large group of developers, all of whom are
working to make it better. The kernel is a premier example of what can be
done when thousands of people work together toward a common goal.
The kernel can always benefit from a larger developer base, though. There
is always more work to do. But, just as importantly, most other
participants in the Linux ecosystem can benefit through contributing to the
kernel. Getting code into the mainline is the key to higher code quality,
lower maintenance and distribution costs, a higher level of influence over
the direction of kernel development, and more. It is a situation where
everybody involved wins. Fire up your editor and come join us; you will be
more than welcome.

3
Documentation/devices.txt
View File

@ -2571,6 +2571,9 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
160 = /dev/usb/legousbtower0 1st USB Legotower device
...
175 = /dev/usb/legousbtower15 16th USB Legotower device
176 = /dev/usb/usbtmc1 First USB TMC device
...
192 = /dev/usb/usbtmc16 16th USB TMC device
240 = /dev/usb/dabusb0 First daubusb device
...
243 = /dev/usb/dabusb3 Fourth dabusb device

59
Documentation/dontdiff
View File

@ -2,11 +2,13 @@
*.aux
*.bin
*.cpio
*.css
*.csp
*.dsp
*.dvi
*.elf
*.eps
*.fw.gen.S
*.fw
*.gen.S
*.gif
*.grep
*.grp
@ -30,6 +32,7 @@
*.s
*.sgml
*.so
*.so.dbg
*.symtypes
*.tab.c
*.tab.h
@ -38,24 +41,17 @@
*.xml
*_MODULES
*_vga16.c
*cscope*
*~
*.9
*.9.gz
.*
.cscope
.gitignore
.mailmap
.mm
53c700_d.h
53c8xx_d.h*
COPYING
CREDITS
CVS
ChangeSet
Image
Kerntypes
MODS.txt
Module.markers
Module.symvers
PENDING
SCCS
@ -73,7 +69,9 @@ autoconf.h*
bbootsect
bin2c
binkernel.spec
binoffset
bootsect
bounds.h
bsetup
btfixupprep
build
@ -89,39 +87,36 @@ config_data.h*
config_data.gz*
conmakehash
consolemap_deftbl.c*
cpustr.h
crc32table.h*
cscope.*
defkeymap.c*
defkeymap.c
devlist.h*
docproc
dummy_sym.c*
elf2ecoff
elfconfig.h*
filelist
fixdep
fore200e_mkfirm
fore200e_pca_fw.c*
gconf
gen-devlist
gen-kdb_cmds.c*
gen_crc32table
gen_init_cpio
genksyms
gentbl
*_gray256.c
ihex2fw
ikconfig.h*
initramfs_data.cpio
initramfs_data.cpio.gz
initramfs_list
kallsyms
kconfig
kconfig.tk
keywords.c*
keywords.c
ksym.c*
ksym.h*
kxgettext
lkc_defs.h
lex.c*
lex.c
lex.*.c
logo_*.c
logo_*_clut224.c
@ -130,7 +125,6 @@ lxdialog
mach-types
mach-types.h
machtypes.h
make_times_h
map
maui_boot.h
mconf
@ -138,6 +132,7 @@ miboot*
mk_elfconfig
mkboot
mkbugboot
mkcpustr
mkdep
mkprep
mktables
@ -145,11 +140,12 @@ mktree
modpost
modules.order
modversions.h*
ncscope.*
offset.h
offsets.h
oui.c*
parse.c*
parse.h*
parse.c
parse.h
patches*
pca200e.bin
pca200e_ecd.bin2
@ -157,7 +153,7 @@ piggy.gz
piggyback
pnmtologo
ppc_defs.h*
promcon_tbl.c*
promcon_tbl.c
pss_boot.h
qconf
raid6altivec*.c
@ -168,27 +164,38 @@ series
setup
setup.bin
setup.elf
sim710_d.h*
sImage
sm_tbl*
split-include
syscalltab.h
tags
tftpboot.img
timeconst.h
times.h*
tkparse
trix_boot.h
utsrelease.h*
vdso-syms.lds
vdso.lds
vdso32-int80-syms.lds
vdso32-syms.lds
vdso32-syscall-syms.lds
vdso32-sysenter-syms.lds
vdso32.lds
vdso32.so.dbg
vdso64.lds
vdso64.so.dbg
version.h*
vmlinux
vmlinux-*
vmlinux.aout
vmlinux*.lds*
vmlinux*.scr
vmlinux.lds
vsyscall.lds
vsyscall_32.lds
wanxlfw.inc
uImage
unifdef
wakeup.bin
wakeup.elf
wakeup.lds
zImage*
zconf.hash.c

69
Documentation/dvb/technisat.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
How to set up the Technisat devices
===================================
1) Find out what device you have
================================
First start your linux box with a shipped kernel:
lspci -vvv for a PCI device (lsusb -vvv for an USB device) will show you for example:
02:0b.0 Network controller: Techsan Electronics Co Ltd B2C2 FlexCopII DVB chip / Technisat SkyStar2 DVB card (rev 02)
dmesg | grep frontend may show you for example:
DVB: registering frontend 0 (Conexant CX24123/CX24109)...
2) Kernel compilation:
======================
If the Technisat is the only TV device in your box get rid of unnecessary modules and check this one:
"Multimedia devices" => "Customise analog and hybrid tuner modules to build"
In this directory uncheck every driver which is activated there.
Then please activate:
2a) Main module part:
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters"
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 Air/Sky/Cable2PC PCI" in case of a PCI card OR
c.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 Air/Sky/Cable2PC USB" in case of an USB 1.1 adapter
d.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters" => "Enable debug for the B2C2 FlexCop drivers"
Notice: d.) is helpful for troubleshooting
2b) Frontend module part:
1.) Revision 2.3:
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Zarlink VP310/MT312/ZL10313 based"
2.) Revision 2.6:
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ST STV0299 based"
3.) Revision 2.7:
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Samsung S5H1420 based"
c.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Integrant ITD1000 Zero IF tuner for DVB-S/DSS"
d.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ISL6421 SEC controller"
4.) Revision 2.8:
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Conexant CX24113/CX24128 tuner for DVB-S/DSS"
c.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Conexant CX24123 based"
d.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ISL6421 SEC controller"
5.) DVB-T card:
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Zarlink MT352 based"
6.) DVB-C card:
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ST STV0297 based"
7.) ATSC card 1st generation:
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Broadcom BCM3510"
8.) ATSC card 2nd generation:
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "NxtWave Communications NXT2002/NXT2004 based"
c.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "LG Electronics LGDT3302/LGDT3303 based"
Author: Uwe Bugla <uwe.bugla@gmx.de> December 2008

25
Documentation/email-clients.txt
View File

@ -213,4 +213,29 @@ TkRat (GUI)
Works. Use "Insert file..." or external editor.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Gmail (Web GUI)
If you just have to use Gmail to send patches, it CAN be made to work. It
requires a bit of external help, though.
The first problem is that Gmail converts tabs to spaces. This will
totally break your patches. To prevent this, you have to use a different
editor. There is a firefox extension called "ViewSourceWith"
(https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/394) which allows you to
edit any text box in the editor of your choice. Configure it to launch
your favorite editor. When you want to send a patch, use this technique.
Once you have crafted your messsage + patch, save and exit the editor,
which should reload the Gmail edit box. GMAIL WILL PRESERVE THE TABS.
Hoorah. Apparently you can cut-n-paste literal tabs, but Gmail will
convert those to spaces upon sending!
The second problem is that Gmail converts tabs to spaces on replies. If
you reply to a patch, don't expect to be able to apply it as a patch.
The last problem is that Gmail will base64-encode any message that has a
non-ASCII character. That includes things like European names. Be aware.
Gmail is not convenient for lkml patches, but CAN be made to work.
###

1
Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt
View File

@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ graphics devices. These would include:
Intel 915GM
Intel 945G
Intel 945GM
Intel 945GME
Intel 965G
Intel 965GM

92
Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt
View File

@ -5,9 +5,13 @@ The driver supports the following options, either via
options=<OPTIONS> when modular or video=pxafb:<OPTIONS> when built in.
For example:
modprobe pxafb options=mode:640x480-8,passive
modprobe pxafb options=vmem:2M,mode:640x480-8,passive
or on the kernel command line
video=pxafb:mode:640x480-8,passive
video=pxafb:vmem:2M,mode:640x480-8,passive
vmem: VIDEO_MEM_SIZE
Amount of video memory to allocate (can be suffixed with K or M
for kilobytes or megabytes)
mode:XRESxYRES[-BPP]
XRES == LCCR1_PPL + 1
@ -52,3 +56,87 @@ outputen:POLARITY
pixclockpol:POLARITY
pixel clock polarity
0 => falling edge, 1 => rising edge
Overlay Support for PXA27x and later LCD controllers
====================================================
PXA27x and later processors support overlay1 and overlay2 on-top of the
base framebuffer (although under-neath the base is also possible). They
support palette and no-palette RGB formats, as well as YUV formats (only
available on overlay2). These overlays have dedicated DMA channels and
behave in a similar way as a framebuffer.
However, there are some differences between these overlay framebuffers
and normal framebuffers, as listed below:
1. overlay can start at a 32-bit word aligned position within the base
framebuffer, which means they have a start (x, y). This information
is encoded into var->nonstd (no, var->xoffset and var->yoffset are
not for such purpose).
2. overlay framebuffer is allocated dynamically according to specified
'struct fb_var_screeninfo', the amount is decided by:
var->xres_virtual * var->yres_virtual * bpp
bpp = 16 -- for RGB565 or RGBT555
= 24 -- for YUV444 packed
= 24 -- for YUV444 planar
= 16 -- for YUV422 planar (1 pixel = 1 Y + 1/2 Cb + 1/2 Cr)
= 12 -- for YUV420 planar (1 pixel = 1 Y + 1/4 Cb + 1/4 Cr)
NOTE:
a. overlay does not support panning in x-direction, thus
var->xres_virtual will always be equal to var->xres
b. line length of overlay(s) must be on a 32-bit word boundary,
for YUV planar modes, it is a requirement for the component
with minimum bits per pixel, e.g. for YUV420, Cr component
for one pixel is actually 2-bits, it means the line length
should be a multiple of 16-pixels
c. starting horizontal position (XPOS) should start on a 32-bit
word boundary, otherwise the fb_check_var() will just fail.
d. the rectangle of the overlay should be within the base plane,
otherwise fail
Applications should follow the sequence below to operate an overlay
framebuffer:
a. open("/dev/fb[1-2]", ...)
b. ioctl(fd, FBIOGET_VSCREENINFO, ...)
c. modify 'var' with desired parameters:
1) var->xres and var->yres
2) larger var->yres_virtual if more memory is required,
usually for double-buffering
3) var->nonstd for starting (x, y) and color format
4) var->{red, green, blue, transp} if RGB mode is to be used
d. ioctl(fd, FBIOPUT_VSCREENINFO, ...)
e. ioctl(fd, FBIOGET_FSCREENINFO, ...)
f. mmap
g. ...
3. for YUV planar formats, these are actually not supported within the
framebuffer framework, application has to take care of the offsets
and lengths of each component within the framebuffer.
4. var->nonstd is used to pass starting (x, y) position and color format,
the detailed bit fields are shown below:
31 23 20 10 0
+-----------------+---+----------+----------+
| ... unused ... |FOR| XPOS | YPOS |
+-----------------+---+----------+----------+
FOR - color format, as defined by OVERLAY_FORMAT_* in pxafb.h
0 - RGB
1 - YUV444 PACKED
2 - YUV444 PLANAR
3 - YUV422 PLANAR
4 - YUR420 PLANAR
XPOS - starting horizontal position
YPOS - starting vertical position

4
Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt
View File

@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ are either given on the kernel command line or as module parameters, e.g.:
video=uvesafb:1024x768-32,mtrr:3,ywrap (compiled into the kernel)
# modprobe uvesafb mode=1024x768-32 mtrr=3 scroll=ywrap (module)
# modprobe uvesafb mode_option=1024x768-32 mtrr=3 scroll=ywrap (module)
Accepted options:
@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ vtotal:n
<mode> The mode you want to set, in the standard modedb format. Refer to
modedb.txt for a detailed description. When uvesafb is compiled as
a module, the mode string should be provided as a value of the
'mode' option.
'mode_option' option.
vbemode:x
Force the use of VBE mode x. The mode will only be set if it's

870
Documentation/fb/viafb.modes Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,870 @@
#
#
# These data are based on the CRTC parameters in
#
# VIA Integration Graphics Chip
# (C) 2004 VIA Technologies Inc.
#
#
# 640x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (25.175 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 640 480
# Scan Frequency 31.469 kHz 59.94 Hz
# Sync Width 3.813 us 0.064 ms
# 12 chars 2 lines
# Front Porch 0.636 us 0.318 ms
# 2 chars 10 lines
# Back Porch 1.907 us 1.048 ms
# 6 chars 33 lines
# Active Time 25.422 us 15.253 ms
# 80 chars 480 lines
# Blank Time 6.356 us 1.430 ms
# 20 chars 45 lines
# Polarity negative negative
#
mode "640x480-60"
# D: 25.175 MHz, H: 31.469 kHz, V: 59.94 Hz
geometry 640 480 640 480 32
timings 39722 48 16 33 10 96 2 endmode mode "480x640-60"
# D: 24.823 MHz, H: 39.780 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 480 640 480 640 32 timings 39722 72 24 19 1 48 3 endmode
#
# 640x480, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.50 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 640 480
# Scan Frequency 37.500 kHz 75.00 Hz
# Sync Width 2.032 us 0.080 ms
# 8 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.027 ms
# 2 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 3.810 us 0.427 ms
# 15 chars 16 lines
# Active Time 20.317 us 12.800 ms
# 80 chars 480 lines
# Blank Time 6.349 us 0.533 ms
# 25 chars 20 lines
# Polarity negative negative
#
mode "640x480-75"
# D: 31.50 MHz, H: 37.500 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 31747 120 16 16 1 64 3 endmode
#
# 640x480, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (36.000 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 640 480
# Scan Frequency 43.269 kHz 85.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.556 us 0.069 ms
# 7 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 1.556 us 0.023 ms
# 7 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.222 us 0.578 ms
# 10 chars 25 lines
# Active Time 17.778 us 11.093 ms
# 80 chars 480 lines
# Blank Time 5.333 us 0.670 ms
# 24 chars 29 lines
# Polarity negative negative
#
mode "640x480-85"
# D: 36.000 MHz, H: 43.269 kHz, V: 85.00 Hz
geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 27777 80 56 25 1 56 3 endmode
#
# 640x480, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (43.163 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 640 480
# Scan Frequency 50.900 kHz 100.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.483 us 0.058 ms
# 8 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.927 us 0.019 ms
# 5 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.409 us 0.475 ms
# 13 chars 25 lines
# Active Time 14.827 us 9.430 ms
# 80 chars 480 lines
# Blank Time 4.819 us 0.570 ms
# 26 chars 29 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "640x480-100"
# D: 43.163 MHz, H: 50.900 kHz, V: 100.00 Hz
geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 23168 104 40 25 1 64 3 endmode
#
# 640x480, 120 Hz, Non-Interlaced (52.406 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 640 480
# Scan Frequency 61.800 kHz 120.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.221 us 0.048 ms
# 8 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.763 us 0.016 ms
# 5 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 1.984 us 0.496 ms
# 13 chars 31 lines
# Active Time 12.212 us 7.767 ms
# 80 chars 480 lines
# Blank Time 3.969 us 0.566 ms
# 26 chars 35 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "640x480-120"
# D: 52.406 MHz, H: 61.800 kHz, V: 120.00 Hz
geometry 640 480 640 480 32 timings 19081 104 40 31 1 64 3 endmode
#
# 720x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (26.880 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 720 480
# Scan Frequency 30.000 kHz 60.241 Hz
# Sync Width 2.679 us 0.099 ms
# 9 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.595 us 0.033 ms
# 2 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 3.274 us 0.462 ms
# 11 chars 14 lines
# Active Time 26.786 us 16.000 ms
# 90 chars 480 lines
# Blank Time 6.548 us 0.600 ms
# 22 chars 18 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "720x480-60"
# D: 26.880 MHz, H: 30.000 kHz, V: 60.24 Hz
geometry 720 480 720 480 32 timings 37202 88 16 14 1 72 3 endmode
#
# 800x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (29.581 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 800 480
# Scan Frequency 29.892 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 2.704 us 100.604 us
# 10 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.541 us 33.535 us
# 2 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 3.245 us 435.949 us
# 12 chars 13 lines
# Active Time 27.044 us 16.097 ms
# 100 chars 480 lines
# Blank Time 6.491 us 0.570 ms
# 24 chars 17 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "800x480-60"
# D: 29.500 MHz, H: 29.738 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 800 480 800 480 32 timings 33805 96 24 10 3 72 7 endmode
#
# 720x576, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (32.668 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 720 576
# Scan Frequency 35.820 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 2.204 us 0.083 ms
# 9 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.735 us 0.027 ms
# 3 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.939 us 0.459 ms
# 12 chars 17 lines
# Active Time 22.040 us 16.080 ms
# 90 chars 476 lines
# Blank Time 5.877 us 0.586 ms
# 24 chars 21 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "720x576-60"
# D: 32.668 MHz, H: 35.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 720 576 720 576 32 timings 30611 96 24 17 1 72 3 endmode
#
# 800x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (40.00 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 800 600
# Scan Frequency 37.879 kHz 60.32 Hz
# Sync Width 3.200 us 0.106 ms
# 16 chars 4 lines
# Front Porch 1.000 us 0.026 ms
# 5 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.200 us 0.607 ms
# 11 chars 23 lines
# Active Time 20.000 us 15.840 ms
# 100 chars 600 lines
# Blank Time 6.400 us 0.739 ms
# 32 chars 28 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "800x600-60"
# D: 40.00 MHz, H: 37.879 kHz, V: 60.32 Hz
geometry 800 600 800 600 32
timings 25000 88 40 23 1 128 4 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 800x600, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (49.50 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 800 600
# Scan Frequency 46.875 kHz 75.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.616 us 0.064 ms
# 10 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.323 us 0.021 ms
# 2 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 3.232 us 0.448 ms
# 20 chars 21 lines
# Active Time 16.162 us 12.800 ms
# 100 chars 600 lines
# Blank Time 5.172 us 0.533 ms
# 32 chars 25 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "800x600-75"
# D: 49.50 MHz, H: 46.875 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
geometry 800 600 800 600 32
timings 20203 160 16 21 1 80 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 800x600, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (56.25 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 800 600
# Scan Frequency 53.674 kHz 85.061 Hz
# Sync Width 1.138 us 0.056 ms
# 8 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.569 us 0.019 ms
# 4 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.702 us 0.503 ms
# 19 chars 27 lines
# Active Time 14.222 us 11.179 ms
# 100 chars 600 lines
# Blank Time 4.409 us 0.578 ms
# 31 chars 31 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "800x600-85"
# D: 56.25 MHz, H: 53.674 kHz, V: 85.061 Hz
geometry 800 600 800 600 32
timings 17777 152 32 27 1 64 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 800x600, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (67.50 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 800 600
# Scan Frequency 62.500 kHz 100.00 Hz
# Sync Width 0.948 us 0.064 ms
# 8 chars 4 lines
# Front Porch 0.000 us 0.112 ms
# 0 chars 7 lines
# Back Porch 3.200 us 0.224 ms
# 27 chars 14 lines
# Active Time 11.852 us 9.600 ms
# 100 chars 600 lines
# Blank Time 4.148 us 0.400 ms
# 35 chars 25 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "800x600-100"
# D: 67.50 MHz, H: 62.500 kHz, V: 100.00 Hz
geometry 800 600 800 600 32
timings 14667 216 0 14 7 64 4 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 800x600, 120 Hz, Non-Interlaced (83.950 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 800 600
# Scan Frequency 77.160 kHz 120.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.048 us 0.039 ms
# 11 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.667 us 0.013 ms
# 7 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 1.715 us 0.507 ms
# 18 chars 39 lines
# Active Time 9.529 us 7.776 ms
# 100 chars 600 lines
# Blank Time 3.431 us 0.557 ms
# 36 chars 43 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "800x600-120"
# D: 83.950 MHz, H: 77.160 kHz, V: 120.00 Hz
geometry 800 600 800 600 32
timings 11912 144 56 39 1 88 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 848x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.490 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 848 480
# Scan Frequency 29.820 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 2.795 us 0.099 ms
# 11 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.033 ms
# 2 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 3.303 us 0.429 ms
# 13 chars 13 lines
# Active Time 26.929 us 16.097 ms
# 106 chars 480 lines
# Blank Time 6.605 us 0.570 ms
# 26 chars 17 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "848x480-60"
# D: 31.500 MHz, H: 29.830 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 848 480 848 480 32
timings 31746 104 24 12 3 80 5 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 856x480, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (31.728 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 856 480
# Scan Frequency 29.820 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 2.774 us 0.099 ms
# 11 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.504 us 0.033 ms
# 2 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 3.728 us 0.429 ms
# 13 chars 13 lines
# Active Time 26.979 us 16.097 ms
# 107 chars 480 lines
# Blank Time 6.556 us 0.570 ms
# 26 chars 17 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "856x480-60"
# D: 31.728 MHz, H: 29.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 856 480 856 480 32
timings 31518 104 16 13 1 88 3
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "960x600-60"
# D: 45.250 MHz, H: 37.212 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 960 600 960 600 32 timings 22099 128 32 15 3 96 6 endmode
#
# 1000x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (48.068 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1000 600
# Scan Frequency 37.320 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 2.164 us 0.080 ms
# 13 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.832 us 0.027 ms
# 5 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.996 us 0.483 ms
# 18 chars 18 lines
# Active Time 20.804 us 16.077 ms
# 125 chars 600 lines
# Blank Time 5.991 us 0.589 ms
# 36 chars 22 lines
# Polarity negative positive
#
mode "1000x600-60"
# D: 48.068 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1000 600 1000 600 32
timings 20834 144 40 18 1 104 3 endmode mode "1024x576-60"
# D: 46.996 MHz, H: 35.820 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1024 576 1024 576 32
timings 21278 144 40 17 1 104 3 endmode mode "1024x600-60"
# D: 48.964 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1024 600 1024 600 32
timings 20461 144 40 18 1 104 3 endmode mode "1088x612-60"
# D: 52.952 MHz, H: 38.040 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1088 612 1088 612 32 timings 18877 152 48 16 3 104 5 endmode
#
# 1024x512, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (41.291 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1024 512
# Scan Frequency 31.860 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 2.519 us 0.094 ms
# 13 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.775 us 0.031 ms
# 4 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 3.294 us 0.465 ms
# 17 chars 15 lines
# Active Time 24.800 us 16.070 ms
# 128 chars 512 lines
# Blank Time 6.587 us 0.596 ms
# 34 chars 19 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1024x512-60"
# D: 41.291 MHz, H: 31.860 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1024 512 1024 512 32
timings 24218 126 32 15 1 104 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 1024x600, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (48.875 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1024 768
# Scan Frequency 37.252 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 2.128 us 80.532us
# 13 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.818 us 26.844 us
# 5 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.946 us 483.192 us
# 18 chars 18 lines
# Active Time 20.951 us 16.697 ms
# 128 chars 622 lines
# Blank Time 5.893 us 0.591 ms
# 36 chars 22 lines
# Polarity negative positive
#
#mode "1024x600-60"
# # D: 48.875 MHz, H: 37.252 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
# geometry 1024 600 1024 600 32
# timings 20460 144 40 18 1 104 3
# endmode
#
# 1024x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (65.00 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1024 768
# Scan Frequency 48.363 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 2.092 us 0.124 ms
# 17 chars 6 lines
# Front Porch 0.369 us 0.062 ms
# 3 chars 3 lines
# Back Porch 2.462 us 0.601 ms
# 20 chars 29 lines
# Active Time 15.754 us 15.880 ms
# 128 chars 768 lines
# Blank Time 4.923 us 0.786 ms
# 40 chars 38 lines
# Polarity negative negative
#
mode "1024x768-60"
# D: 65.00 MHz, H: 48.363 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32 timings 15385 160 24 29 3 136 6 endmode
#
# 1024x768, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (78.75 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1024 768
# Scan Frequency 60.023 kHz 75.03 Hz
# Sync Width 1.219 us 0.050 ms
# 12 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.203 us 0.017 ms
# 2 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.235 us 0.466 ms
# 22 chars 28 lines
# Active Time 13.003 us 12.795 ms
# 128 chars 768 lines
# Blank Time 3.657 us 0.533 ms
# 36 chars 32 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1024x768-75"
# D: 78.75 MHz, H: 60.023 kHz, V: 75.03 Hz
geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32
timings 12699 176 16 28 1 96 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 1024x768, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (94.50 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1024 768
# Scan Frequency 68.677 kHz 85.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.016 us 0.044 ms
# 12 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.508 us 0.015 ms
# 6 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.201 us 0.524 ms
# 26 chars 36 lines
# Active Time 10.836 us 11.183 ms
# 128 chars 768 lines
# Blank Time 3.725 us 0.582 ms
# 44 chars 40 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1024x768-85"
# D: 94.50 MHz, H: 68.677 kHz, V: 85.00 Hz
geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32
timings 10582 208 48 36 1 96 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 1024x768, 100 Hz, Non-Interlaced (110.0 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1024 768
# Scan Frequency 79.023 kHz 99.78 Hz
# Sync Width 0.800 us 0.101 ms
# 11 chars 8 lines
# Front Porch 0.000 us 0.000 ms
# 0 chars 0 lines
# Back Porch 2.545 us 0.202 ms
# 35 chars 16 lines
# Active Time 9.309 us 9.719 ms
# 128 chars 768 lines
# Blank Time 3.345 us 0.304 ms
# 46 chars 24 lines
# Polarity negative negative
#
mode "1024x768-100"
# D: 113.3 MHz, H: 79.023 kHz, V: 99.78 Hz
geometry 1024 768 1024 768 32
timings 8825 280 0 16 0 88 8 endmode mode "1152x720-60"
# D: 66.750 MHz, H: 44.859 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1152 720 1152 720 32 timings 14981 168 56 19 3 112 6 endmode
#
# 1152x864, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (110.0 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1152 864
# Scan Frequency 75.137 kHz 74.99 Hz
# Sync Width 1.309 us 0.106 ms
# 18 chars 8 lines
# Front Porch 0.245 us 0.599 ms
# 3 chars 45 lines
# Back Porch 1.282 us 1.132 ms
# 18 chars 85 lines
# Active Time 10.473 us 11.499 ms
# 144 chars 864 lines
# Blank Time 2.836 us 1.837 ms
# 39 chars 138 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1152x864-75"
# D: 110.0 MHz, H: 75.137 kHz, V: 74.99 Hz
geometry 1152 864 1152 864 32
timings 9259 144 24 85 45 144 8
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1200x720-60"
# D: 70.184 MHz, H: 44.760 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1200 720 1200 720 32
timings 14253 184 28 22 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x600-60"
# D: 61.503 MHz, H: 37.320 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1280 600 1280 600 32
timings 16260 184 28 18 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x720-50"
# D: 60.466 MHz, H: 37.050 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz
geometry 1280 720 1280 720 32
timings 16538 176 48 17 1 128 3 endmode mode "1280x768-50"
# D: 65.178 MHz, H: 39.550 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz
geometry 1280 768 1280 768 32 timings 15342 184 28 19 1 128 3 endmode
#
# 1280x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (80.136 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1280 768
# Scan Frequency 47.700 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.697 us 0.063 ms
# 17 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.799 us 0.021 ms
# 8 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.496 us 0.483 ms
# 25 chars 23 lines
# Active Time 15.973 us 16.101 ms
# 160 chars 768 lines
# Blank Time 4.992 us 0.566 ms
# 50 chars 27 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1280x768-60"
# D: 80.13 MHz, H: 47.700 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1280 768 1280 768 32
timings 12480 200 48 23 1 126 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 1280x800, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (83.375 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1280 800
# Scan Frequency 49.628 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.631 us 60.450 us
# 17 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.768 us 20.15 us
# 8 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.399 us 0.483 ms
# 25 chars 24 lines
# Active Time 15.352 us 16.120 ms
# 160 chars 800 lines
# Blank Time 4.798 us 0.564 ms
# 50 chars 28 lines
# Polarity negtive positive
#
mode "1280x800-60"
# D: 83.500 MHz, H: 49.702 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1280 800 1280 800 32 timings 11994 200 72 22 3 128 6 endmode
#
# 1280x960, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (108.00 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1280 960
# Scan Frequency 60.000 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.050 ms
# 14 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.889 us 0.017 ms
# 12 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.889 us 0.600 ms
# 39 chars 36 lines
# Active Time 11.852 us 16.000 ms
# 160 chars 960 lines
# Blank Time 4.815 us 0.667 ms
# 65 chars 40 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1280x960-60"
# D: 108.00 MHz, H: 60.000 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1280 960 1280 960 32
timings 9259 312 96 36 1 112 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 1280x1024, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (108.00 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1280 1024
# Scan Frequency 63.981 kHz 60.02 Hz
# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.047 ms
# 14 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.444 us 0.015 ms
# 6 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.297 us 0.594 ms
# 31 chars 38 lines
# Active Time 11.852 us 16.005 ms
# 160 chars 1024 lines
# Blank Time 3.778 us 0.656 ms
# 51 chars 42 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1280x1024-60"
# D: 108.00 MHz, H: 63.981 kHz, V: 60.02 Hz
geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32
timings 9260 248 48 38 1 112 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 1280x1024, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (135.00 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1280 1024
# Scan Frequency 79.976 kHz 75.02 Hz
# Sync Width 1.067 us 0.038 ms
# 18 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.119 us 0.012 ms
# 2 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 1.837 us 0.475 ms
# 31 chars 38 lines
# Active Time 9.481 us 12.804 ms
# 160 chars 1024 lines
# Blank Time 3.022 us 0.525 ms
# 51 chars 42 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1280x1024-75"
# D: 135.00 MHz, H: 79.976 kHz, V: 75.02 Hz
geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32
timings 7408 248 16 38 1 144 3 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 1280x1024, 85 Hz, Non-Interlaced (157.50 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1280 1024
# Scan Frequency 91.146 kHz 85.02 Hz
# Sync Width 1.016 us 0.033 ms
# 20 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.406 us 0.011 ms
# 8 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 1.422 us 0.483 ms
# 28 chars 44 lines
# Active Time 8.127 us 11.235 ms
# 160 chars 1024 lines
# Blank Time 2.844 us 0.527 ms
# 56 chars 48 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1280x1024-85"
# D: 157.50 MHz, H: 91.146 kHz, V: 85.02 Hz
geometry 1280 1024 1280 1024 32
timings 6349 224 64 44 1 160 3
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1440x900-60"
# D: 106.500 MHz, H: 55.935 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1440 900 1440 900 32
timings 9390 232 80 25 3 152 6
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1440x900-75"
# D: 136.750 MHz, H: 70.635 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
geometry 1440 900 1440 900 32
timings 7315 248 96 33 3 152 6 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 1440x1050, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (125.10 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1440 1050
# Scan Frequency 65.220 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.204 us 0.046 ms
# 19 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.760 us 0.015 ms
# 12 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 1.964 us 0.495 ms
# 31 chars 33 lines
# Active Time 11.405 us 16.099 ms
# 180 chars 1050 lines
# Blank Time 3.928 us 0.567 ms
# 62 chars 37 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1440x1050-60"
# D: 125.10 MHz, H: 65.220 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1440 1050 1440 1050 32
timings 7993 248 96 33 1 152 3
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1600x900-60"
# D: 118.250 MHz, H: 55.990 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1600 900 1600 900 32
timings 8415 256 88 26 3 168 5 endmode mode "1600x1024-60"
# D: 136.358 MHz, H: 63.600 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1600 1024 1600 1024 32 timings 7315 272 104 32 1 168 3 endmode
#
# 1600x1200, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (156.00 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1600 1200
# Scan Frequency 76.200 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.026 us 0.105 ms
# 20 chars 8 lines
# Front Porch 0.205 us 0.131 ms
# 4 chars 10 lines
# Back Porch 1.636 us 0.682 ms
# 32 chars 52 lines
# Active Time 10.256 us 15.748 ms
# 200 chars 1200 lines
# Blank Time 2.872 us 0.866 ms
# 56 chars 66 lines
# Polarity negative negative
#
mode "1600x1200-60"
# D: 156.00 MHz, H: 76.200 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1600 1200 1600 1200 32 timings 6172 256 32 52 10 160 8 endmode
#
# 1600x1200, 75 Hz, Non-Interlaced (202.50 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1600 1200
# Scan Frequency 93.750 kHz 75.00 Hz
# Sync Width 0.948 us 0.032 ms
# 24 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.316 us 0.011 ms
# 8 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 1.501 us 0.491 ms
# 38 chars 46 lines
# Active Time 7.901 us 12.800 ms
# 200 chars 1200 lines
# Blank Time 2.765 us 0.533 ms
# 70 chars 50 lines
# Polarity positive positive
#
mode "1600x1200-75"
# D: 202.50 MHz, H: 93.750 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
geometry 1600 1200 1600 1200 32
timings 4938 304 64 46 1 192 3
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1680x1050-60"
# D: 146.250 MHz, H: 65.290 kHz, V: 59.954 Hz
geometry 1680 1050 1680 1050 32
timings 6814 280 104 30 3 176 6
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1680x1050-75"
# D: 187.000 MHz, H: 82.306 kHz, V: 74.892 Hz
geometry 1680 1050 1680 1050 32
timings 5348 296 120 40 3 176 6
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1792x1344-60"
# D: 202.975 MHz, H: 83.460 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1792 1344 1792 1344 32
timings 4902 320 128 43 1 192 3
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1856x1392-60"
# D: 218.571 MHz, H: 86.460 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1856 1392 1856 1392 32
timings 4577 336 136 45 1 200 3
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1200-60"
# D: 193.250 MHz, H: 74.556 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1920 1200 1920 1200 32
timings 5173 336 136 36 3 200 6
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1440-60"
# D: 234.000 MHz, H:90.000 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1920 1440 1920 1440 32
timings 4274 344 128 56 1 208 3
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "1920x1440-75"
# D: 297.000 MHz, H:112.500 kHz, V: 75.00 Hz
geometry 1920 1440 1920 1440 32
timings 3367 352 144 56 1 224 3
hsync high vsync high endmode mode "2048x1536-60"
# D: 267.250 MHz, H: 95.446 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 2048 1536 2048 1536 32
timings 3742 376 152 49 3 224 4 hsync high vsync high endmode
#
# 1280x720, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (74.481 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1280 720
# Scan Frequency 44.760 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.826 us 67.024 ms
# 17 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.752 us 22.341 ms
# 7 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.578 us 491.510 ms
# 24 chars 22 lines
# Active Time 17.186 us 16.086 ms
# 160 chars 720 lines
# Blank Time 5.156 us 0.581 ms
# 48 chars 26 lines
# Polarity negative negative
#
mode "1280x720-60"
# D: 74.481 MHz, H: 44.760 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1280 720 1280 720 32 timings 13426 192 64 22 1 136 3 endmode
#
# 1920x1080, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (172.798 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1920 1080
# Scan Frequency 67.080 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.204 us 44.723 ms
# 26 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.694 us 14.908 ms
# 15 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 1.898 us 506.857 ms
# 41 chars 34 lines
# Active Time 11.111 us 16.100 ms
# 240 chars 1080 lines
# Blank Time 3.796 us 0.566 ms
# 82 chars 38 lines
# Polarity negative negative
#
mode "1920x1080-60"
# D: 74.481 MHz, H: 67.080 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1920 1080 1920 1080 32 timings 5787 328 120 34 1 208 3 endmode
#
# 1400x1050, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (122.61 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1400 1050
# Scan Frequency 65.218 kHz 59.99 Hz
# Sync Width 1.037 us 0.047 ms
# 19 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.444 us 0.015 ms
# 11 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 1.185 us 0.188 ms
# 30 chars 33 lines
# Active Time 12.963 us 16.411 ms
# 175 chars 1050 lines
# Blank Time 2.667 us 0.250 ms
# 60 chars 37 lines
# Polarity negative positive
#
mode "1400x1050-60"
# D: 122.750 MHz, H: 65.317 kHz, V: 59.99 Hz
geometry 1400 1050 1408 1050 32
timings 8214 232 88 32 3 144 4 endmode mode "1400x1050-75"
# D: 156.000 MHz, H: 82.278 kHz, V: 74.867 Hz
geometry 1400 1050 1408 1050 32 timings 6410 248 104 42 3 144 4 endmode
#
# 1366x768, 60 Hz, Non-Interlaced (85.86 MHz dotclock)
#
# Horizontal Vertical
# Resolution 1366 768
# Scan Frequency 47.700 kHz 60.00 Hz
# Sync Width 1.677 us 0.063 ms
# 18 chars 3 lines
# Front Porch 0.839 us 0.021 ms
# 9 chars 1 lines
# Back Porch 2.516 us 0.482 ms
# 27 chars 23 lines
# Active Time 15.933 us 16.101 ms
# 171 chars 768 lines
# Blank Time 5.031 us 0.566 ms
# 54 chars 27 lines
# Polarity negative positive
#
mode "1360x768-60"
# D: 84.750 MHz, H: 47.720 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1360 768 1360 768 32
timings 11799 208 72 22 3 136 5 endmode mode "1366x768-60"
# D: 85.86 MHz, H: 47.700 kHz, V: 60.00 Hz
geometry 1366 768 1366 768 32
timings 11647 216 72 23 1 144 3 endmode mode "1366x768-50"
# D: 69,924 MHz, H: 39.550 kHz, V: 50.00 Hz
geometry 1366 768 1366 768 32 timings 14301 200 56 19 1 144 3 endmode

214
Documentation/fb/viafb.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,214 @@
VIA Integration Graphic Chip Console Framebuffer Driver
[Platform]
-----------------------
The console framebuffer driver is for graphics chips of
VIA UniChrome Family(CLE266, PM800 / CN400 / CN300,
P4M800CE / P4M800Pro / CN700 / VN800,
CX700 / VX700, K8M890, P4M890,
CN896 / P4M900, VX800)
[Driver features]
------------------------
Device: CRT, LCD, DVI
Support viafb_mode:
CRT:
640x480(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz), 720x480(60 Hz),
720x576(60 Hz), 800x600(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz),
848x480(60 Hz), 856x480(60 Hz), 1024x512(60 Hz),
1024x768(60, 75, 85, 100 Hz), 1152x864(75 Hz),
1280x768(60 Hz), 1280x960(60 Hz), 1280x1024(60, 75, 85 Hz),
1440x1050(60 Hz), 1600x1200(60, 75 Hz), 1280x720(60 Hz),
1920x1080(60 Hz), 1400x1050(60 Hz), 800x480(60 Hz)
color depth: 8 bpp, 16 bpp, 32 bpp supports.
Support 2D hardware accelerator.
[Using the viafb module]
-- -- --------------------
Start viafb with default settings:
#modprobe viafb
Start viafb with with user options:
#modprobe viafb viafb_mode=800x600 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh=60
viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_dvi_port=DVP1
viafb_mode1=1024x768 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh1=60
viafb_SAMM_ON=1
viafb_mode:
640x480 (default)
720x480
800x600
1024x768
......
viafb_bpp:
8, 16, 32 (default:32)
viafb_refresh:
60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60)
viafb_lcd_dsp_method:
0 : expansion (default)
1 : centering
viafb_lcd_mode:
0 : LCD panel with LSB data format input (default)
1 : LCD panel with MSB data format input
viafb_lcd_panel_id:
0 : Resolution: 640x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
1 : Resolution: 800x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
2 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable (default)
3 : Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
4 : Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
5 : Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
6 : Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
8 : Resolution: 800x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
9 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
10: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
11: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
12: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
13: Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
14: Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
15: Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
16: Resolution: 1366x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
17: Resolution: 1024x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
18: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
19: Resolution: 1280x800, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
viafb_accel:
0 : No 2D Hardware Acceleration
1 : 2D Hardware Acceleration (default)
viafb_SAMM_ON:
0 : viafb_SAMM_ON disable (default)
1 : viafb_SAMM_ON enable
viafb_mode1: (secondary display device)
640x480 (default)
720x480
800x600
1024x768
... ...
viafb_bpp1: (secondary display device)
8, 16, 32 (default:32)
viafb_refresh1: (secondary display device)
60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60)
viafb_active_dev:
This option is used to specify active devices.(CRT, DVI, CRT+LCD...)
DVI stands for DVI or HDMI, E.g., If you want to enable HDMI,
set viafb_active_dev=DVI. In SAMM case, the previous of
viafb_active_dev is primary device, and the following is
secondary device.
For example:
To enable one device, such as DVI only, we can use:
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI
To enable two devices, such as CRT+DVI:
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI;
For DuoView case, we can use:
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI
OR
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT...
For SAMM case:
If CRT is primary and DVI is secondary, we should use:
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_SAMM_ON=1...
If DVI is primary and CRT is secondary, we should use:
modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT viafb_SAMM_ON=1...
viafb_display_hardware_layout:
This option is used to specify display hardware layout for CX700 chip.
1 : LCD only
2 : DVI only
3 : LCD+DVI (default)
4 : LCD1+LCD2 (internal + internal)
16: LCD1+ExternalLCD2 (internal + external)
viafb_second_size:
This option is used to set second device memory size(MB) in SAMM case.
The minimal size is 16.
viafb_platform_epia_dvi:
This option is used to enable DVI on EPIA - M
0 : No DVI on EPIA - M (default)
1 : DVI on EPIA - M
viafb_bus_width:
When using 24 - Bit Bus Width Digital Interface,
this option should be set.
12: 12-Bit LVDS or 12-Bit TMDS (default)
24: 24-Bit LVDS or 24-Bit TMDS
viafb_device_lcd_dualedge:
When using Dual Edge Panel, this option should be set.
0 : No Dual Edge Panel (default)
1 : Dual Edge Panel
viafb_video_dev:
This option is used to specify video output devices(CRT, DVI, LCD) for
duoview case.
For example:
To output video on DVI, we should use:
modprobe viafb viafb_video_dev=DVI...
viafb_lcd_port:
This option is used to specify LCD output port,
available values are "DVP0" "DVP1" "DFP_HIGHLOW" "DFP_HIGH" "DFP_LOW".
for external LCD + external DVI on CX700(External LCD is on DVP0),
we should use:
modprobe viafb viafb_lcd_port=DVP0...
Notes:
1. CRT may not display properly for DuoView CRT & DVI display at
the "640x480" PAL mode with DVI overscan enabled.
2. SAMM stands for single adapter multi monitors. It is different from
multi-head since SAMM support multi monitor at driver layers, thus fbcon
layer doesn't even know about it; SAMM's second screen doesn't have a
device node file, thus a user mode application can't access it directly.
When SAMM is enabled, viafb_mode and viafb_mode1, viafb_bpp and
viafb_bpp1, viafb_refresh and viafb_refresh1 can be different.
3. When console is depending on viafbinfo1, dynamically change resolution
and bpp, need to call VIAFB specified ioctl interface VIAFB_SET_DEVICE
instead of calling common ioctl function FBIOPUT_VSCREENINFO since
viafb doesn't support multi-head well, or it will cause screen crush.
4. VX800 2D accelerator hasn't been supported in this driver yet. When
using driver on VX800, the driver will disable the acceleration
function as default.
[Configure viafb with "fbset" tool]
-----------------------------------
"fbset" is an inbox utility of Linux.
1. Inquire current viafb information, type,
# fbset -i
2. Set various resolutions and viafb_refresh rates,
# fbset <resolution-vertical_sync>
example,
# fbset "1024x768-75"
or
# fbset -g 1024 768 1024 768 32
Check the file "/etc/fb.modes" to find display modes available.
3. Set the color depth,
# fbset -depth <value>
example,
# fbset -depth 16
[Bootup with viafb]:
--------------------
Add the following line to your grub.conf:
append = "video=viafb:viafb_mode=1024x768,viafb_bpp=32,viafb_refresh=85"

60
Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
View File

@ -56,30 +56,6 @@ Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
---------------------------
What: old tuner-3036 i2c driver
When: 2.6.28
Why: This driver is for VERY old i2c-over-parallel port teletext receiver
boxes. Rather then spending effort on converting this driver to V4L2,
and since it is extremely unlikely that anyone still uses one of these
devices, it was decided to drop it.
Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl>
Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
---------------------------
What: V4L2 dpc7146 driver
When: 2.6.28
Why: Old driver for the dpc7146 demonstration board that is no longer
relevant. The last time this was tested on actual hardware was
probably around 2002. Since this is a driver for a demonstration
board the decision was made to remove it rather than spending a
lot of effort continually updating this driver to stay in sync
with the latest internal V4L2 or I2C API.
Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl>
Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
---------------------------
What: PCMCIA control ioctl (needed for pcmcia-cs [cardmgr, cardctl])
When: November 2005
Files: drivers/pcmcia/: pcmcia_ioctl.c
@ -144,13 +120,6 @@ Who: Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
---------------------------
What: eepro100 network driver
When: January 2007
Why: replaced by the e100 driver
Who: Adrian Bunk <bunk@stusta.de>
---------------------------
What: Unused EXPORT_SYMBOL/EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL exports
(temporary transition config option provided until then)
The transition config option will also be removed at the same time.
@ -268,18 +237,6 @@ Who: Michael Buesch <mb@bu3sch.de>
---------------------------
What: init_mm export
When: 2.6.26
Why: Not used in-tree. The current out-of-tree users used it to
work around problems in the CPA code which should be resolved
by now. One usecase was described to provide verification code
of the CPA operation. That's a good idea in general, but such
code / infrastructure should be in the kernel and not in some
out-of-tree driver.
Who: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
----------------------------
What: usedac i386 kernel parameter
When: 2.6.27
Why: replaced by allowdac and no dac combination
@ -294,6 +251,15 @@ Who: Jiri Slaby <jirislaby@gmail.com>
---------------------------
What: print_fn_descriptor_symbol()
When: October 2009
Why: The %pF vsprintf format provides the same functionality in a
simpler way. print_fn_descriptor_symbol() is deprecated but
still present to give out-of-tree modules time to change.
Who: Bjorn Helgaas <bjorn.helgaas@hp.com>
---------------------------
What: /sys/o2cb symlink
When: January 2010
Why: /sys/fs/o2cb is the proper location for this information - /sys/o2cb
@ -350,3 +316,11 @@ Why: The 2.6 kernel supports direct writing to ide CD drives, which
eliminates the need for ide-scsi. The new method is more
efficient in every way.
Who: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
---------------------------
What: i2c_attach_client(), i2c_detach_client(), i2c_driver->detach_client()
When: 2.6.29 (ideally) or 2.6.30 (more likely)
Why: Deprecated by the new (standard) device driver binding model. Use
i2c_driver->probe() and ->remove() instead.
Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>

12
Documentation/filesystems/Locking
View File

@ -161,8 +161,12 @@ prototypes:
int (*set_page_dirty)(struct page *page);
int (*readpages)(struct file *filp, struct address_space *mapping,
struct list_head *pages, unsigned nr_pages);
int (*prepare_write)(struct file *, struct page *, unsigned, unsigned);
int (*commit_write)(struct file *, struct page *, unsigned, unsigned);
int (*write_begin)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping,
loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned flags,
struct page **pagep, void **fsdata);
int (*write_end)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping,
loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned copied,
struct page *page, void *fsdata);
sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t);
int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long);
int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int);
@ -180,8 +184,6 @@ sync_page: no maybe
writepages: no
set_page_dirty no no
readpages: no
prepare_write: no yes yes
commit_write: no yes yes
write_begin: no locks the page yes
write_end: no yes, unlocks yes
perform_write: no n/a yes
@ -191,7 +193,7 @@ releasepage: no yes
direct_IO: no
launder_page: no yes
->prepare_write(), ->commit_write(), ->sync_page() and ->readpage()
->write_begin(), ->write_end(), ->sync_page() and ->readpage()
may be called from the request handler (/dev/loop).
->readpage() unlocks the page, either synchronously or via I/O

393
Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
Miscellaneous Device control operations for the autofs4 kernel module
====================================================================
The problem
===========
There is a problem with active restarts in autofs (that is to say
restarting autofs when there are busy mounts).
During normal operation autofs uses a file descriptor opened on the
directory that is being managed in order to be able to issue control
operations. Using a file descriptor gives ioctl operations access to
autofs specific information stored in the super block. The operations
are things such as setting an autofs mount catatonic, setting the
expire timeout and requesting expire checks. As is explained below,
certain types of autofs triggered mounts can end up covering an autofs
mount itself which prevents us being able to use open(2) to obtain a
file descriptor for these operations if we don't already have one open.
Currently autofs uses "umount -l" (lazy umount) to clear active mounts
at restart. While using lazy umount works for most cases, anything that
needs to walk back up the mount tree to construct a path, such as
getcwd(2) and the proc file system /proc/<pid>/cwd, no longer works
because the point from which the path is constructed has been detached
from the mount tree.
The actual problem with autofs is that it can't reconnect to existing
mounts. Immediately one thinks of just adding the ability to remount
autofs file systems would solve it, but alas, that can't work. This is
because autofs direct mounts and the implementation of "on demand mount
and expire" of nested mount trees have the file system mounted directly
on top of the mount trigger directory dentry.
For example, there are two types of automount maps, direct (in the kernel
module source you will see a third type called an offset, which is just
a direct mount in disguise) and indirect.
Here is a master map with direct and indirect map entries:
/- /etc/auto.direct
/test /etc/auto.indirect
and the corresponding map files:
/etc/auto.direct:
/automount/dparse/g6 budgie:/autofs/export1
/automount/dparse/g1 shark:/autofs/export1
and so on.
/etc/auto.indirect:
g1 shark:/autofs/export1
g6 budgie:/autofs/export1
and so on.
For the above indirect map an autofs file system is mounted on /test and
mounts are triggered for each sub-directory key by the inode lookup
operation. So we see a mount of shark:/autofs/export1 on /test/g1, for
example.
The way that direct mounts are handled is by making an autofs mount on
each full path, such as /automount/dparse/g1, and using it as a mount
trigger. So when we walk on the path we mount shark:/autofs/export1 "on
top of this mount point". Since these are always directories we can
use the follow_link inode operation to trigger the mount.
But, each entry in direct and indirect maps can have offsets (making
them multi-mount map entries).
For example, an indirect mount map entry could also be:
g1 \
/ shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test \
/s1 shark:/autofs/export/testing/test/s1 \
/s2 shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test/s2 \
/s1/ss1 shark:/autofs/export1 \
/s2/ss2 shark:/autofs/export2
and a similarly a direct mount map entry could also be:
/automount/dparse/g1 \
/ shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test \
/s1 shark:/autofs/export/testing/test/s1 \
/s2 shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test/s2 \
/s1/ss1 shark:/autofs/export2 \
/s2/ss2 shark:/autofs/export2
One of the issues with version 4 of autofs was that, when mounting an
entry with a large number of offsets, possibly with nesting, we needed
to mount and umount all of the offsets as a single unit. Not really a
problem, except for people with a large number of offsets in map entries.
This mechanism is used for the well known "hosts" map and we have seen
cases (in 2.4) where the available number of mounts are exhausted or
where the number of privileged ports available is exhausted.
In version 5 we mount only as we go down the tree of offsets and
similarly for expiring them which resolves the above problem. There is
somewhat more detail to the implementation but it isn't needed for the
sake of the problem explanation. The one important detail is that these
offsets are implemented using the same mechanism as the direct mounts
above and so the mount points can be covered by a mount.
The current autofs implementation uses an ioctl file descriptor opened
on the mount point for control operations. The references held by the
descriptor are accounted for in checks made to determine if a mount is
in use and is also used to access autofs file system information held
in the mount super block. So the use of a file handle needs to be
retained.
The Solution
============
To be able to restart autofs leaving existing direct, indirect and
offset mounts in place we need to be able to obtain a file handle
for these potentially covered autofs mount points. Rather than just
implement an isolated operation it was decided to re-implement the
existing ioctl interface and add new operations to provide this
functionality.
In addition, to be able to reconstruct a mount tree that has busy mounts,
the uid and gid of the last user that triggered the mount needs to be
available because these can be used as macro substitution variables in
autofs maps. They are recorded at mount request time and an operation
has been added to retrieve them.
Since we're re-implementing the control interface, a couple of other
problems with the existing interface have been addressed. First, when
a mount or expire operation completes a status is returned to the
kernel by either a "send ready" or a "send fail" operation. The
"send fail" operation of the ioctl interface could only ever send
ENOENT so the re-implementation allows user space to send an actual
status. Another expensive operation in user space, for those using
very large maps, is discovering if a mount is present. Usually this
involves scanning /proc/mounts and since it needs to be done quite
often it can introduce significant overhead when there are many entries
in the mount table. An operation to lookup the mount status of a mount
point dentry (covered or not) has also been added.
Current kernel development policy recommends avoiding the use of the
ioctl mechanism in favor of systems such as Netlink. An implementation
using this system was attempted to evaluate its suitability and it was
found to be inadequate, in this case. The Generic Netlink system was
used for this as raw Netlink would lead to a significant increase in
complexity. There's no question that the Generic Netlink system is an
elegant solution for common case ioctl functions but it's not a complete
replacement probably because it's primary purpose in life is to be a
message bus implementation rather than specifically an ioctl replacement.
While it would be possible to work around this there is one concern
that lead to the decision to not use it. This is that the autofs
expire in the daemon has become far to complex because umount
candidates are enumerated, almost for no other reason than to "count"
the number of times to call the expire ioctl. This involves scanning
the mount table which has proved to be a big overhead for users with
large maps. The best way to improve this is try and get back to the
way the expire was done long ago. That is, when an expire request is
issued for a mount (file handle) we should continually call back to
the daemon until we can't umount any more mounts, then return the
appropriate status to the daemon. At the moment we just expire one
mount at a time. A Generic Netlink implementation would exclude this
possibility for future development due to the requirements of the
message bus architecture.
autofs4 Miscellaneous Device mount control interface
====================================================
The control interface is opening a device node, typically /dev/autofs.
All the ioctls use a common structure to pass the needed parameter
information and return operation results:
struct autofs_dev_ioctl {
__u32 ver_major;
__u32 ver_minor;
__u32 size; /* total size of data passed in
* including this struct */
__s32 ioctlfd; /* automount command fd */
__u32 arg1; /* Command parameters */
__u32 arg2;
char path[0];
};
The ioctlfd field is a mount point file descriptor of an autofs mount
point. It is returned by the open call and is used by all calls except
the check for whether a given path is a mount point, where it may
optionally be used to check a specific mount corresponding to a given
mount point file descriptor, and when requesting the uid and gid of the
last successful mount on a directory within the autofs file system.
The fields arg1 and arg2 are used to communicate parameters and results of
calls made as described below.
The path field is used to pass a path where it is needed and the size field
is used account for the increased structure length when translating the
structure sent from user space.
This structure can be initialized before setting specific fields by using
the void function call init_autofs_dev_ioctl(struct autofs_dev_ioctl *).
All of the ioctls perform a copy of this structure from user space to
kernel space and return -EINVAL if the size parameter is smaller than
the structure size itself, -ENOMEM if the kernel memory allocation fails
or -EFAULT if the copy itself fails. Other checks include a version check
of the compiled in user space version against the module version and a
mismatch results in a -EINVAL return. If the size field is greater than
the structure size then a path is assumed to be present and is checked to
ensure it begins with a "/" and is NULL terminated, otherwise -EINVAL is
returned. Following these checks, for all ioctl commands except
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION_CMD, AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT_CMD and
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT_CMD the ioctlfd is validated and if it is
not a valid descriptor or doesn't correspond to an autofs mount point
an error of -EBADF, -ENOTTY or -EINVAL (not an autofs descriptor) is
returned.
The ioctls
==========
An example of an implementation which uses this interface can be seen
in autofs version 5.0.4 and later in file lib/dev-ioctl-lib.c of the
distribution tar available for download from kernel.org in directory
/pub/linux/daemons/autofs/v5.
The device node ioctl operations implemented by this interface are:
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION
------------------------
Get the major and minor version of the autofs4 device ioctl kernel module
implementation. It requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl as an
input parameter and sets the version information in the passed in structure.
It returns 0 on success or the error -EINVAL if a version mismatch is
detected.
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOVER_CMD and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOSUBVER_CMD
------------------------------------------------------------------
Get the major and minor version of the autofs4 protocol version understood
by loaded module. This call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl
with the ioctlfd field set to a valid autofs mount point descriptor
and sets the requested version number in structure field arg1. These
commands return 0 on success or one of the negative error codes if
validation fails.
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT
----------------------------------------------------------
Obtain and release a file descriptor for an autofs managed mount point
path. The open call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with
the the path field set and the size field adjusted appropriately as well
as the arg1 field set to the device number of the autofs mount. The
device number can be obtained from the mount options shown in
/proc/mounts. The close call requires an initialized struct
autofs_dev_ioct with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained
from the open call. The release of the file descriptor can also be done
with close(2) so any open descriptors will also be closed at process exit.
The close call is included in the implemented operations largely for
completeness and to provide for a consistent user space implementation.
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_READY_CMD and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_FAIL_CMD
--------------------------------------------------------
Return mount and expire result status from user space to the kernel.
Both of these calls require an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl
with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open
call and the arg1 field set to the wait queue token number, received
by user space in the foregoing mount or expire request. The arg2 field
is set to the status to be returned. For the ready call this is always
0 and for the fail call it is set to the errno of the operation.
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_SETPIPEFD_CMD
------------------------------
Set the pipe file descriptor used for kernel communication to the daemon.
Normally this is set at mount time using an option but when reconnecting
to a existing mount we need to use this to tell the autofs mount about
the new kernel pipe descriptor. In order to protect mounts against
incorrectly setting the pipe descriptor we also require that the autofs
mount be catatonic (see next call).
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call and
the arg1 field set to descriptor of the pipe. On success the call
also sets the process group id used to identify the controlling process
(eg. the owning automount(8) daemon) to the process group of the caller.
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CATATONIC_CMD
------------------------------
Make the autofs mount point catatonic. The autofs mount will no longer
issue mount requests, the kernel communication pipe descriptor is released
and any remaining waits in the queue released.
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call.
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_TIMEOUT_CMD
----------------------------
Set the expire timeout for mounts withing an autofs mount point.
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call.
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_REQUESTER_CMD
------------------------------
Return the uid and gid of the last process to successfully trigger a the
mount on the given path dentry.
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the path
field set to the mount point in question and the size field adjusted
appropriately as well as the arg1 field set to the device number of the
containing autofs mount. Upon return the struct field arg1 contains the
uid and arg2 the gid.
When reconstructing an autofs mount tree with active mounts we need to
re-connect to mounts that may have used the original process uid and
gid (or string variations of them) for mount lookups within the map entry.
This call provides the ability to obtain this uid and gid so they may be
used by user space for the mount map lookups.
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_EXPIRE_CMD
---------------------------
Issue an expire request to the kernel for an autofs mount. Typically
this ioctl is called until no further expire candidates are found.
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. In
addition an immediate expire, independent of the mount timeout, can be
requested by setting the arg1 field to 1. If no expire candidates can
be found the ioctl returns -1 with errno set to EAGAIN.
This call causes the kernel module to check the mount corresponding
to the given ioctlfd for mounts that can be expired, issues an expire
request back to the daemon and waits for completion.
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ASKUMOUNT_CMD
------------------------------
Checks if an autofs mount point is in use.
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call and
it returns the result in the arg1 field, 1 for busy and 0 otherwise.
AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ISMOUNTPOINT_CMD
---------------------------------
Check if the given path is a mountpoint.
The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl. There are two
possible variations. Both use the path field set to the path of the mount
point to check and the size field adjusted appropriately. One uses the
ioctlfd field to identify a specific mount point to check while the other
variation uses the path and optionaly arg1 set to an autofs mount type.
The call returns 1 if this is a mount point and sets arg1 to the device
number of the mount and field arg2 to the relevant super block magic
number (described below) or 0 if it isn't a mountpoint. In both cases
the the device number (as returned by new_encode_dev()) is returned
in field arg1.
If supplied with a file descriptor we're looking for a specific mount,
not necessarily at the top of the mounted stack. In this case the path
the descriptor corresponds to is considered a mountpoint if it is itself
a mountpoint or contains a mount, such as a multi-mount without a root
mount. In this case we return 1 if the descriptor corresponds to a mount
point and and also returns the super magic of the covering mount if there
is one or 0 if it isn't a mountpoint.
If a path is supplied (and the ioctlfd field is set to -1) then the path
is looked up and is checked to see if it is the root of a mount. If a
type is also given we are looking for a particular autofs mount and if
a match isn't found a fail is returned. If the the located path is the
root of a mount 1 is returned along with the super magic of the mount
or 0 otherwise.

8
Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt
View File

@ -96,6 +96,11 @@ errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
errors=continue Keep going on a filesystem error.
errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
data_err=ignore(*) Just print an error message if an error occurs
in a file data buffer in ordered mode.
data_err=abort Abort the journal if an error occurs in a file
data buffer in ordered mode.
grpid Give objects the same group ID as their creator.
bsdgroups
@ -193,6 +198,5 @@ kernel source: <file:fs/ext3/>
programs: http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net/
http://ext2resize.sourceforge.net
useful links: http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/ext3/ext3-usage.html
http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs7/
useful links: http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs7/
http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs8/

32
Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
View File

@ -2,19 +2,24 @@
Ext4 Filesystem
===============
This is a development version of the ext4 filesystem, an advanced level
of the ext3 filesystem which incorporates scalability and reliability
enhancements for supporting large filesystems (64 bit) in keeping with
increasing disk capacities and state-of-the-art feature requirements.
Ext4 is an an advanced level of the ext3 filesystem which incorporates
scalability and reliability enhancements for supporting large filesystems
(64 bit) in keeping with increasing disk capacities and state-of-the-art
feature requirements.
Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
Web site: http://ext4.wiki.kernel.org
1. Quick usage instructions:
===========================
Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be
found at the ext4 wiki site at the URL:
http://ext4.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Ext4_Howto
- Compile and install the latest version of e2fsprogs (as of this
writing version 1.41) from:
writing version 1.41.3) from:
http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=2406
@ -36,11 +41,9 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
# mke2fs -t ext4 /dev/hda1
Or configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents and set
the test_fs flag to indicate that it's ok for an in-development
filesystem to touch this filesystem:
Or to configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents:
# tune2fs -O extents -E test_fs /dev/hda1
# tune2fs -O extents /dev/hda1
If the filesystem was created with 128 byte inodes, it can be
converted to use 256 byte for greater efficiency via:
@ -104,8 +107,8 @@ exist yet so I'm not sure they're in the near-term roadmap.
The big performance win will come with mballoc, delalloc and flex_bg
grouping of bitmaps and inode tables. Some test results available here:
- http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080530/ffsb-write-2.6.26-rc2.html
- http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080530/ffsb-readwrite-2.6.26-rc2.html
- http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080818-ffsb/ffsb-write-2.6.27-rc1.html
- http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080818-ffsb/ffsb-readwrite-2.6.27-rc1.html
3. Options
==========
@ -214,9 +217,6 @@ noreservation
bsddf (*) Make 'df' act like BSD.
minixdf Make 'df' act like Minix.
check=none Don't do extra checking of bitmaps on mount.
nocheck
debug Extra debugging information is sent to syslog.
errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
@ -253,8 +253,6 @@ nobh (a) cache disk block mapping information
"nobh" option tries to avoid associating buffer
heads (supported only for "writeback" mode).
mballoc (*) Use the multiple block allocator for block allocation
nomballoc disabled multiple block allocator for block allocation.
stripe=n Number of filesystem blocks that mballoc will try
to use for allocation size and alignment. For RAID5/6
systems this should be the number of data

2
Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt
View File

@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ They depend on various facilities being available:
3.1) Booting from a floppy using syslinux
When building kernels, an easy way to create a boot floppy that uses
syslinux is to use the zdisk or bzdisk make targets which use
syslinux is to use the zdisk or bzdisk make targets which use zimage
and bzimage images respectively. Both targets accept the
FDARGS parameter which can be used to set the kernel command line.

3
Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
View File

@ -28,10 +28,7 @@ Manish Singh <manish.singh@oracle.com>
Caveats
=======
Features which OCFS2 does not support yet:
- extended attributes
- quotas
- cluster aware flock
- cluster aware lockf
- Directory change notification (F_NOTIFY)
- Distributed Caching (F_SETLEASE/F_GETLEASE/break_lease)
- POSIX ACLs

76
Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
View File

@ -44,6 +44,7 @@ Table of Contents
2.14 /proc/<pid>/io - Display the IO accounting fields
2.15 /proc/<pid>/coredump_filter - Core dump filtering settings
2.16 /proc/<pid>/mountinfo - Information about mounts
2.17 /proc/sys/fs/epoll - Configuration options for the epoll interface
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Preface
@ -1321,15 +1322,30 @@ debugging information is displayed on console.
NMI switch that most IA32 servers have fires unknown NMI up, for example.
If a system hangs up, try pressing the NMI switch.
panic_on_unrecovered_nmi
------------------------
The default Linux behaviour on an NMI of either memory or unknown is to continue
operation. For many environments such as scientific computing it is preferable
that the box is taken out and the error dealt with than an uncorrected
parity/ECC error get propogated.
A small number of systems do generate NMI's for bizarre random reasons such as
power management so the default is off. That sysctl works like the existing
panic controls already in that directory.
nmi_watchdog
------------
Enables/Disables the NMI watchdog on x86 systems. When the value is non-zero
the NMI watchdog is enabled and will continuously test all online cpus to
determine whether or not they are still functioning properly.
determine whether or not they are still functioning properly. Currently,
passing "nmi_watchdog=" parameter at boot time is required for this function
to work.
Because the NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile, by disabling the NMI
watchdog, oprofile may have more registers to utilize.
If LAPIC NMI watchdog method is in use (nmi_watchdog=2 kernel parameter), the
NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile. By disabling the NMI watchdog,
oprofile may have more registers to utilize.
msgmni
------
@ -1372,15 +1388,18 @@ causes the kernel to prefer to reclaim dentries and inodes.
dirty_background_ratio
----------------------
Contains, as a percentage of total system memory, the number of pages at which
the pdflush background writeback daemon will start writing out dirty data.
Contains, as a percentage of the dirtyable system memory (free pages + mapped
pages + file cache, not including locked pages and HugePages), the number of
pages at which the pdflush background writeback daemon will start writing out
dirty data.
dirty_ratio
-----------------
Contains, as a percentage of total system memory, the number of pages at which
a process which is generating disk writes will itself start writing out dirty
data.
Contains, as a percentage of the dirtyable system memory (free pages + mapped
pages + file cache, not including locked pages and HugePages), the number of
pages at which a process which is generating disk writes will itself start
writing out dirty data.
dirty_writeback_centisecs
-------------------------
@ -2400,24 +2419,29 @@ will be dumped when the <pid> process is dumped. coredump_filter is a bitmask
of memory types. If a bit of the bitmask is set, memory segments of the
corresponding memory type are dumped, otherwise they are not dumped.
The following 4 memory types are supported:
The following 7 memory types are supported:
- (bit 0) anonymous private memory
- (bit 1) anonymous shared memory
- (bit 2) file-backed private memory
- (bit 3) file-backed shared memory
- (bit 4) ELF header pages in file-backed private memory areas (it is
effective only if the bit 2 is cleared)
- (bit 5) hugetlb private memory
- (bit 6) hugetlb shared memory
Note that MMIO pages such as frame buffer are never dumped and vDSO pages
are always dumped regardless of the bitmask status.
Default value of coredump_filter is 0x3; this means all anonymous memory
segments are dumped.
Note bit 0-4 doesn't effect any hugetlb memory. hugetlb memory are only
effected by bit 5-6.
Default value of coredump_filter is 0x23; this means all anonymous memory
segments and hugetlb private memory are dumped.
If you don't want to dump all shared memory segments attached to pid 1234,
write 1 to the process's proc file.
write 0x21 to the process's proc file.
$ echo 0x1 > /proc/1234/coredump_filter
$ echo 0x21 > /proc/1234/coredump_filter
When a new process is created, the process inherits the bitmask status from its
parent. It is useful to set up coredump_filter before the program runs.
@ -2463,4 +2487,30 @@ For more information on mount propagation see:
Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt
2.17 /proc/sys/fs/epoll - Configuration options for the epoll interface
--------------------------------------------------------
This directory contains configuration options for the epoll(7) interface.
max_user_instances
------------------
This is the maximum number of epoll file descriptors that a single user can
have open at a given time. The default value is 128, and should be enough
for normal users.
max_user_watches
----------------
Every epoll file descriptor can store a number of files to be monitored
for event readiness. Each one of these monitored files constitutes a "watch".
This configuration option sets the maximum number of "watches" that are
allowed for each user.
Each "watch" costs roughly 90 bytes on a 32bit kernel, and roughly 160 bytes
on a 64bit one.
The current default value for max_user_watches is the 1/32 of the available
low memory, divided for the "watch" cost in bytes.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

14
Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
View File

@ -130,12 +130,12 @@ The 2.6 kernel build process always creates a gzipped cpio format initramfs
archive and links it into the resulting kernel binary. By default, this
archive is empty (consuming 134 bytes on x86).
The config option CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE (for some reason buried under
devices->block devices in menuconfig, and living in usr/Kconfig) can be used
to specify a source for the initramfs archive, which will automatically be
incorporated into the resulting binary. This option can point to an existing
gzipped cpio archive, a directory containing files to be archived, or a text
file specification such as the following example:
The config option CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE (in General Setup in menuconfig,
and living in usr/Kconfig) can be used to specify a source for the
initramfs archive, which will automatically be incorporated into the
resulting binary. This option can point to an existing gzipped cpio
archive, a directory containing files to be archived, or a text file
specification such as the following example:
dir /dev 755 0 0
nod /dev/console 644 0 0 c 5 1
@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ User Mode Linux, like so:
sleep(999999999);
}
EOF
gcc -static hello2.c -o init
gcc -static hello.c -o init
echo init | cpio -o -H newc | gzip > test.cpio.gz
# Testing external initramfs using the initrd loading mechanism.
qemu -kernel /boot/vmlinuz -initrd test.cpio.gz /dev/zero

9
Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
View File

@ -86,6 +86,15 @@ norm_unmount (*) commit on unmount; the journal is committed
fast_unmount do not commit on unmount; this option makes
unmount faster, but the next mount slower
because of the need to replay the journal.
bulk_read read more in one go to take advantage of flash
media that read faster sequentially
no_bulk_read (*) do not bulk-read
no_chk_data_crc skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to
improve read performance. Use this option only
if the flash media is highly reliable. The effect
of this option is that corruption of the contents
of a file can go unnoticed.
chk_data_crc (*) do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes
Quick usage instructions

32
Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt
View File

@ -8,6 +8,12 @@ if you want to format from within Linux.
VFAT MOUNT OPTIONS
----------------------------------------------------------------------
uid=### -- Set the owner of all files on this filesystem.
The default is the uid of current process.
gid=### -- Set the group of all files on this filesystem.
The default is the gid of current process.
umask=### -- The permission mask (for files and directories, see umask(1)).
The default is the umask of current process.
@ -36,7 +42,7 @@ codepage=### -- Sets the codepage number for converting to shortname
characters on FAT filesystem.
By default, FAT_DEFAULT_CODEPAGE setting is used.
iocharset=name -- Character set to use for converting between the
iocharset=<name> -- Character set to use for converting between the
encoding is used for user visible filename and 16 bit
Unicode characters. Long filenames are stored on disk
in Unicode format, but Unix for the most part doesn't
@ -86,6 +92,8 @@ check=s|r|n -- Case sensitivity checking setting.
r: relaxed, case insensitive
n: normal, default setting, currently case insensitive
nocase -- This was deprecated for vfat. Use shortname=win95 instead.
shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed
-- Shortname display/create setting.
lower: convert to lowercase for display,
@ -99,11 +107,31 @@ shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed
tz=UTC -- Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time.
This option disables the conversion of timestamps
between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC
(which Linux uses internally). This is particuluarly
(which Linux uses internally). This is particularly
useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras)
that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of
local time.
showexec -- If set, the execute permission bits of the file will be
allowed only if the extension part of the name is .EXE,
.COM, or .BAT. Not set by default.
debug -- Can be set, but unused by the current implementation.
sys_immutable -- If set, ATTR_SYS attribute on FAT is handled as
IMMUTABLE flag on Linux. Not set by default.
flush -- If set, the filesystem will try to flush to disk more
early than normal. Not set by default.
rodir -- FAT has the ATTR_RO (read-only) attribute. But on Windows,
the ATTR_RO of the directory will be just ignored actually,
and is used by only applications as flag. E.g. it's setted
for the customized folder.
If you want to use ATTR_RO as read-only flag even for
the directory, set this option.
<bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false
TODO

39
Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
View File

@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ written-back to storage typically in whole pages, however the
address_space has finer control of write sizes.
The read process essentially only requires 'readpage'. The write
process is more complicated and uses prepare_write/commit_write or
process is more complicated and uses write_begin/write_end or
set_page_dirty to write data into the address_space, and writepage,
sync_page, and writepages to writeback data to storage.
@ -521,8 +521,6 @@ struct address_space_operations {
int (*set_page_dirty)(struct page *page);
int (*readpages)(struct file *filp, struct address_space *mapping,
struct list_head *pages, unsigned nr_pages);
int (*prepare_write)(struct file *, struct page *, unsigned, unsigned);
int (*commit_write)(struct file *, struct page *, unsigned, unsigned);
int (*write_begin)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping,
loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned flags,
struct page **pagep, void **fsdata);
@ -598,37 +596,7 @@ struct address_space_operations {
readpages is only used for read-ahead, so read errors are
ignored. If anything goes wrong, feel free to give up.
prepare_write: called by the generic write path in VM to set up a write
request for a page. This indicates to the address space that
the given range of bytes is about to be written. The
address_space should check that the write will be able to
complete, by allocating space if necessary and doing any other
internal housekeeping. If the write will update parts of
any basic-blocks on storage, then those blocks should be
pre-read (if they haven't been read already) so that the
updated blocks can be written out properly.
The page will be locked.
Note: the page _must not_ be marked uptodate in this function
(or anywhere else) unless it actually is uptodate right now. As
soon as a page is marked uptodate, it is possible for a concurrent
read(2) to copy it to userspace.
commit_write: If prepare_write succeeds, new data will be copied
into the page and then commit_write will be called. It will
typically update the size of the file (if appropriate) and
mark the inode as dirty, and do any other related housekeeping
operations. It should avoid returning an error if possible -
errors should have been handled by prepare_write.
write_begin: This is intended as a replacement for prepare_write. The
key differences being that:
- it returns a locked page (in *pagep) rather than being
given a pre locked page;
- it must be able to cope with short writes (where the
length passed to write_begin is greater than the number
of bytes copied into the page).
write_begin:
Called by the generic buffered write code to ask the filesystem to
prepare to write len bytes at the given offset in the file. The
address_space should check that the write will be able to complete,
@ -640,6 +608,9 @@ struct address_space_operations {
The filesystem must return the locked pagecache page for the specified
offset, in *pagep, for the caller to write into.
It must be able to cope with short writes (where the length passed to
write_begin is greater than the number of bytes copied into the page).
flags is a field for AOP_FLAG_xxx flags, described in
include/linux/fs.h.

4
Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt
View File

@ -229,10 +229,6 @@ The following sysctls are available for the XFS filesystem:
ISGID bit is cleared if the irix_sgid_inherit compatibility sysctl
is set.
fs.xfs.restrict_chown (Min: 0 Default: 1 Max: 1)
Controls whether unprivileged users can use chown to "give away"
a file to another user.
fs.xfs.inherit_sync (Min: 0 Default: 1 Max: 1)
Setting this to "1" will cause the "sync" flag set
by the xfs_io(8) chattr command on a directory to be

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More